JP7093913B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In recent pachinko gaming machines, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, a big hit (special game). ) The mainstream is a pachinko machine that shifts to the state and opens the large prize opening provided on the game board to win a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this way, a time-shortening gaming state that increases the efficiency of probability fluctuation gaming states that increase the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and symbol fluctuations for notifying the lottery results in the jackpot lottery. There are also gaming machines that enhance the interest of the game by creating a gaming progress state that is advantageous to the player according to these gaming states.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-08632 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-268924 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-0587885

However, since many such gaming machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that realizes further novel playability.

A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
An identification information display unit that can display identification information,
Equipped with a staging display unit that can display staging
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A hit / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on a random number acquired by a random number acquisition means,
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Identification information display content An identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means.
It is advantageous for the player when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means is the first winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group. A special game control means for executing the first special game,
It is advantageous for the player when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means is the second winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the special stop identification information belonging to the special group. Special game control means for executing special games, and
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and is equipped with a game state transition control means that can control the state to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed.
By entering the game ball into a specific area during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute the second special game which is advantageous for the player.
It is configured so that the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information in the predetermined period of the specific gaming state and the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information in the specific period of the specific gaming state are different.
A specific period is set after the specified period, and the specified period is configured to be longer than the specified period.
One event is that the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the special game, and it is configured to be able to shift to the normal game state when the one event occurs a predetermined number of times in the specific game state. And
The number of types of advance notice effects that are not executed when the result of the pass / fail judgment by the win / fail determination means is the second win, rather than the number of types of advance notice effects that are not executed when the result of the win / fail determination by the win / fail determination means is the first win. It is configured to have more.
<Additional Notes>
In addition, although other embodiments different from this embodiment are listed below, they can be implemented without any limitation.
The pachinko gaming machine according to another aspect different from this aspect is
A start port (for example, the first main game start port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, specific area C22) where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
An identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying identification information, and
It is equipped with an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and
A hit / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on a random number acquired by a random number acquisition means,
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Identification information display content An identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means.
The result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means is winning, and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20) is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group. A special game control means for executing a special game that is advantageous to the player in the event of a problem,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main game start port A10) than in the normal game state, and is controlled to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. Equipped with a possible game state transition control means,
It has multiple types of specific stop identification information as the specific stop identification information that belongs to the first specific group in the specific group.
It has multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group.
Regardless of which of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same as each other.
Regardless of which of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same as each other.
When one of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when any one of the multiple types of specified stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed. In, the execution contents of the special game are configured to be different from each other.
During the execution of the special game, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10) is open until a predetermined number of balls have been entered in the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10) or a predetermined time has elapsed. ) Can be executed in a unit game that is advantageous to the player.
The unit in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group The ease of entering the specific area in the game is the unit in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group. It is configured to be higher than the ease of entering a specific area in the game.
Entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game executed by stopping and displaying the identification information in the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the normal game state. If there is a ball, the special game end demo period corresponding to the special game is configured to be the first period.
Entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game executed by stopping and displaying the identification information in the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific game state. If there is a ball, the special game end demo period corresponding to the special game is configured to be the second period.
When the end demo period of the special game is the first period, the effect display content performed by the effect display unit in the first period, and when the end demo period of the special game is the second period. It is configured so as to be different from the effect display content performed by the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) in the second period.
It has a plurality of types of effect modes as an effect mode that depends on controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
When the end demo period of the special game is the first period, the effect mode when the specific game state is reached after the execution of the special game is completed, and the end demo period of the special game is the second period. It is configured to be the same as the effect mode when the specific game state is reached after the execution of the special game in.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, further novel game performance can be realized in a gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a gaming progress state that is advantageous for the player.

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a special game operation condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect execution determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a configuration diagram of an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of a limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an opening pattern of a large winning opening on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the start demo time control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the start demo effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is an operation diagram relating to the second large winning opening C20 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the lower shielding member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the V winning opening ball entry determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of a small hit game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is an action diagram relating to winning a prize in the V winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of a symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 84 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 85 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 92 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hit-related time saving end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the small hit-related time saving end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a table relating to the content of external terminal transmission on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a table relating to the content of external terminal transmission on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 105 is an example of an electric accessory opening time applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 106 is an example of a case where a small hit is won in the final change of the time-reduced gaming state applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 107 is an example of a notice effect applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example.

Form to carry out

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which no prize ball is paid out. The "identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably visual information such as numbers, letters, and patterns. Those having a shape such as, etc. can be mentioned. Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (designation), but is referred to as a "special symbol (special symbol)".
Is the identification information whose display is controlled on the main control board side, and "decorative design (designation)" is the identification information as an effect displayed on the sub control board side. "Displayable identification information" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal display, LED, 7-segment display) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color) and physics. Display (for example, the symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. "Direction" refers to the display content that enhances the interest of the game, for example, moving images such as animations and live-action photographs, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc., including identification information fluctuation / stop, notice, etc. The combination can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as an evacuation state). In a configuration that can take (there is) (so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning state is easy, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes pseudo-random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense (for example, hard as a random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning or losing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the definite identification information, but at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the entry port (for example, the start entry port) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is referred to as one random number). .. Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a transition to a special gaming state in which the large winning opening can be opened, or a transition to a special gaming state rather than a non-probability variable gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high probability of lottery, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the start port In some cases, any one or more combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short time of notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member). The "expected average execution time of the easy-to-enter ball game per unit time" assumes a situation in which the symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is constantly changed (for example, a situation in which a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol always exists). In the case, it means the ratio occupied by the opening period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, in other words based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example. , When a variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the opening period of the variable member (so-called open extension function operating state / non-operating state), and the winning of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member. High or low probability (so-called high-probability lottery state / low-probability lottery state), length of fluctuation time of normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of variable members (so-called normal figure fluctuation shortening function non-operating state / operating state) ), Etc. are realized by any one or more combinations. The "average value of the variable display period of the identification information" is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information and taking the average value based on the measured value. More specifically, when it is configured to determine the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information, and there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). , The expected value based on the multiple types of variable display period (sum of "selection probability x variable display period"), but if there is only one type of candidate for the variable display period to be selected, that one type It becomes the variable display period itself (that is, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept is limited to the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss, the concept is limited to the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variable display period with the highest selection probability. It may be added that the concept may be limited to, that is, the purpose of this wording is to use it as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that the player can experience (hence, "the variable display period of the identification information". As a realization method for making the "mean value" different, the candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period are different, or even if the candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period are the same, a further variable display period is added. There are various methods such as different period values, but the method is not limited to one of them). "The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is different from the first period. "Having at least a variable period state," means having not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states). (Target), for example, the state transition from "first variable period state" → "second variable period state" → "third variable period state" according to the number of fluctuation display times of the identification information. Including those that can be obtained. In this case, when the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information in each state is configured to be "first fluctuation period state"<"second fluctuation period state"<"thirth fluctuation period state". It is possible to construct a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state {Of course, the opposite state transition (game progress state) may be constructed. In that case, it is suitable when used in combination with the probability fluctuation game state that continues until the next big hit + the electric chew specific game state (despite the situation where the next big hit is definite, the next big hit cannot be obtained. As the situation continues, the speed of the game progresses, so it may be possible to dispel the fatigue at the time of so-called hamari)}. Furthermore, as a feature of each state, in the "first variable period state", the difference between the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit is ". In the "third variable period state", which is smaller than the difference in the "second variable period state", the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit are In addition to the difference being smaller than the difference in the "second variable period state", the variable display period of the identification information, especially at the time of loss, tends to be relatively long compared to the "first variable period state" ( That is, fluctuations suggesting hits and reach or reach fluctuations are likely to occur), and in the "second fluctuation period state", the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is relatively longer than in other states. Easy {that is, the fluctuation display period of short fluctuation loss where the loss is deterministic and the fluctuation display period of medium fluctuation loss suggesting a hit are not selected (or difficult to select), but the fluctuation display of reach fluctuation (per long fluctuation) It can be exemplified that it has a feature that it is selected (or easily selected) only for a period. The "specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed" may be the period from immediately after the execution of the special game is completed until the symbol is changed for a predetermined number of times, or the special game may be changed. It may be a period from the time when the symbol change is made one or more times after the execution of the special game is completed until the symbol change is made for a predetermined number of times (that is, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed). If it is within the specified range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within that range. Therefore, the above-mentioned "first variable period state"->"second variable period state"->"third variable period state" If the state transition with can be taken, the specific period can mean the period of stay in the "first variable period state" and / or the "second variable period state"). "When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold" means that, for example, a special game (so-called big hit game) is likely to occur at the time of the hold digestion, but the special game may occur. The judgment criteria are not particularly limited. More specifically, "winning random number (win / fail lottery random number)", "variation mode determination random number" for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determination random number" for determining the stop symbol, A random number value such as a "hit symbol determination random number" that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, a probability fluctuation game) after a special game may be used as a judgment criterion, or the event content derived from these random number values (hit / fail judgment result). , Length of fluctuation time, type of stop symbol, possibility of transition to specific game, etc.) may be used as judgment criteria. In the case of suggesting, "suggesting or notifying the existence of a hold" is, for example, an effect at the time of hold digestion until the hold is reached (the pattern variation mode of the decorative symbol and its interlocking performance). It is possible to change the execution mode of the background effect, etc.), and when notifying, for example, the display mode of the hold indicator lamp (which may be an image on the liquid crystal display device) at the time of the hold occurrence. (In that case, change the display color, change the display shape, etc.), change the sound generated by the hold or the sound of BGM, etc. at the time of the hold occurrence, the lamp for staging at the time of the hold occurrence. The lighting mode of (frame lamp, etc.) is changed, or the execution mode of other effects (design variation mode of decorative symbols, background effect performed in conjunction with it, etc.) performed at the time of the pending occurrence. Can be mentioned.

The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 multifunction device) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service, etc.). .. It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of turning on / off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa. Further, the term "table" in this example is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that it is an associated aspect. Further, the numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modification {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} are It is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, conditions between the first main game side and the second main game side, conditions between the probability fluctuation game and the non-probability fluctuation game, time reduction game and non-time reduction game). It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (conditions with time reduction games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate as long as they do not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples. Should. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first main game side and the second main game side in terms of the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of special game is the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is exemplified so as to be, even if the magnitude relationship is appropriately changed such that the first main game side <second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (same for other numbers and conditions). Further, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability fluctuation game state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, whether to set "65535" as the number of continuations (configured so as to substantially continue). Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability fluctuation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as the purpose of the following embodiments and changes is not significantly deviated. Should be understood that may be changed as appropriate.

Here, FIGS. 1 and 2 show configurations applicable to the pachinko game according to this example. Further, the following concepts can be extracted (listed) from the configurations shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation of these listed concepts (upper conceptualization), but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the examples described later are added to these concepts. You may. The time reduction game state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on or the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time reduction game state. May indicate that the open time extension function is activated, and the non-time reduction gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is not activated.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to shift to a probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the jackpot by entering the specific area C22 during the jackpot (also referred to as a ball probability machine), and a concept based on the configuration. as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (1) is
A start port (for example, the first main game start port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, specific area C22) where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
It is equipped with an identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying identification information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10), and
A hit / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on a random number acquired by a random number acquisition means,
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20) is controlled to stop and display the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means and
A special game advantageous to the player when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group. Special game control means to be executed and
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main game start port A10) than in the normal game state, and is controlled to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. Equipped with a possible game state transition control means,
It has multiple types of specific stop identification information as the specific stop identification information that belongs to the first specific group in the specific group.
It has multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group.
Regardless of which of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same as each other.
Regardless of which of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same as each other.
When one of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when any one of the multiple types of specified stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed. In, the execution contents of the special game are configured to be different from each other.
During the execution of the special game, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10) is open until a predetermined number of balls have been entered in the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10) or a predetermined time has elapsed. ) Can be executed in a unit game that is advantageous to the player.
The ease of entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group becomes the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be higher than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in a unit game in a corresponding special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the symbol variation on the second main game side is more advantageous to the player than the symbol variation on the first main game side, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows. ,
The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (2) is
It relates to the number of prize balls that the player can obtain by the special game when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group. The expected value is acquired by the player by a special game when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means is winning and the stop identification information of the first identification information is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be relatively larger than the expected value related to the number of prize balls that can be made.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the hold on the second main game side is preferentially digested over the hold on the first main game side, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (3) is
If the second hold exists, the first right / wrong judgment permission condition is not satisfied, while the second right / wrong judgment permission condition can be satisfied regardless of whether the first hold exists or not. It is a pachinko game machine that features.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured so that the jackpot on the second main game side has a higher ratio of the jackpot on the second main game side to easily enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round than the jackpot on the first main game side. However, as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (4) is
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means is the winning and the first. Stop of identification information This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is configured to be relatively easy to stop and display as compared with the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the variation mode determination table referred to after the big hit is different even if the big hit is related to the same big hit symbol, depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the big hit. , As a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (5) is
The first variation pattern table is used as a table to be referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, and the second variation pattern table has a different selection tendency of the variation display time of the second identification information from the first variation pattern table. And at least, after the execution of the special game is completed, it can be controlled to be either a first variable period state that refers to the first variable pattern table or a second variable period state that refers to the second variable pattern table. Equipped with variable period state control means
If there is a ball entering a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the game is placed in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed and the first variable period. On the other hand
If there is no entry into a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the game is placed in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed and the second variable period. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be in a state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the selection tendency of the variation mode determination table to be referred to after the big hit is different even if the big hit is related to the same big hit symbol, depending on whether or not the ball is entered into the specific area C22. , As a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (6) is
There is at least a first variation pattern table as a table referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information, and a second variation pattern table having a different selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information from the first variation pattern table. Then, after the execution of the special game is completed, the variable period state control that can be controlled to be either the first variable period state that refers to the first variable pattern table or the second variable period state that refers to the second variable pattern table. Equipped with means,
If there is a ball entering a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the game is placed in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed and the first variable period. On the other hand
If there is no entry into a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the game is placed in the specific game state and the second variable period after the execution of the special game is completed. It is configured to be in a state
As a table referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information, the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table further have a third variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different.
Fluctuation of identification information The period from the start to the stop display is one unit, and if there is a ball entering a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the special After the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times from the end of the execution of the game, the first variable period state that refers to the first variable pattern table is changed to the third variable period state that refers to the third variable pattern table. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured as such.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22, even if it is a big hit related to the same big hit symbol, whether or not it shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit. Often, as a concept based on this configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (7) is
Depending on whether or not a ball has entered a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, it is determined whether or not the high probability lottery state is reached after the execution of the special game is completed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be played.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that even if it is a big hit related to the same big hit symbol, the effect tendency after the big hit is different depending on whether or not the ball is put into the specific area C22. Is a stage that depends on controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display device SG, and the tendency of the effect to be displayed when the stay stage is different (type of notice effect that can be executed, background effect that can be executed). The type, the execution frequency of the notice effect that can be executed, the execution frequency of the background effect that can be executed, etc.) will be different. The concept based on this configuration is
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (8) is
As an effect mode that depends on controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit, the first effect mode and the first effect mode have a second effect mode in which the effect display content is different.
When a ball enters a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the game is set to the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed, and the first effect mode is set. On the other hand
If there is no ball entering the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the special game state is set and the second effect mode is set after the execution of the special game is completed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to play.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to always enter the time-reduced gaming state after the big hit in the big hit related to the predetermined big hit symbol regardless of whether or not the ball is entered into the specific area C22. As a concept based on composition,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (9) is
Regardless of whether or not a ball has entered a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, it is definite that the game will be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the number of time reductions after the jackpot differs depending on whether or not the ball is entered into the specific area C22, even if the jackpot is related to the same jackpot symbol. as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (10) is
When the specific game state is reached after the execution of the special game is completed, one unit is from the start to the stop display of the fluctuation display of the first identification information or the second identification information.
If there is a ball entering a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the one unit is the first number of lines after the execution of the special game is completed. It is configured to maintain a specific gaming state until it is played.
If there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the one unit is the second number of lines after the execution of the special game is completed. It is configured to maintain a specific gaming state until it is played.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first number of times is configured to be larger than the second number of times.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the tendency of the fluctuation time in the final fluctuation of the time-reduced gaming state differs depending on whether or not the ball is entered into a specific area (for example, before the final fluctuation, the shortest fluctuation time at the time of loss is different. Although it is the same, in the final fluctuation, the shortest fluctuation time at the time of loss may be different), and the concept based on the configuration is
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (11) is
If there is a ball entering a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, in the final round of the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed, The average value of the fluctuation display period of the second identification information when the result of the winning / failing determination by the second winning / failing determination means is non-winning is configured to be the average value A.
If there is no entry into a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, in the final round of the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed, The average value of the fluctuation display period of the second identification information when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means is not won is configured to be the average value B which is a value different from the average value A. It is a pachinko game machine that features.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the production content in the final change of the time-reduced gaming state differs depending on whether or not the ball is inserted into the specific area C22, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (12) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
A sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
A staging display content control means capable of controlling the staging display content displayed on the staging display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means is provided.
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal gaming state.
The variable display of the identification information is set as one unit from the start to the stop display, and in the case of a specific gaming state, after the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be controllable so as to be in the normal gaming state. ,
It is configured to be in a specific game state after the end of the special game,
If there is a ball entering a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the effect display in the final round of the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. The content is configured to be the staging display content A,
If there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the effect display in the final round of the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the content is configured to be an effect display content B, which is an effect display content different from the effect display content A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is a gaming machine that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot by entering the specific area C22 during the jackpot, and is in a limited frequency state for a predetermined period after the end of the time-reduced gaming state. {Do not select a fluctuation time longer than a predetermined time (for example, the fluctuation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation that is a candidate for selection of the fluctuation time is executed) (pseudo continuous fluctuation is a decorative symbol in one symbol fluctuation). This is a variation in which the temporary stop display of is executed multiple times to make the player appear as if the symbol variation has been executed multiple times.)} The concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (13) is
Regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the normal game state is changed from the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the variation display time of the identification information does not exceed a specific time from the time when the game is entered until the one unit is performed a specific number of times.

Regardless of whether or not the pachinko gaming machine according to this example is allowed to enter the specific area C22, the pachinko gaming machine shifts to the limited frequency state after the time shortening game state in which the player enters after the big hit is completed in the big hit related to the same big hit symbol (the limitation). Even if a big hit is made in the frequency state, it may be regarded as a continuation of the consecutive villas), and the concept based on this configuration is
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (14) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal gaming state.
The variable display of the identification information is set as one unit from the start to the stop display, and in the case of a specific gaming state, after the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number of times, it can be controlled to be in the normal gaming state. Cage,
Fluctuations of identification information First fluctuation period in which the average value of the display period is the first period, and fluctuations in the identification information Second fluctuation in which the average value of the display period is different from the first period. It is configured to have at least a period state and
At the time of executing a certain special game, regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the specific area, it is configured to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed.
When the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number of times after the specific gaming state is reached, the normal gaming state and the first variable period state are set.
The period from the start to the stop of the variable display of the identification information is set as one unit, and in the case of the first variable period state, after the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number, it can be controlled to be in the second variable period state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured as such.

Even if the pachinko gaming machine according to this example enters the specific area C22 with a jackpot related to the same jackpot symbol, the start demo time and / or the end demo time differs depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot (start). The output mode of the external terminal signal related to the demo time and / or the external terminal signal related to the end demo time may be different). In the case of a short open jackpot, the end demo time may be the same regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot, or the difference in the end demo time may be relatively small, and the concept is based on the configuration. teeth,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (15) is
Entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game executed by stopping and displaying the identification information in the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the normal game state. If there is a ball, the special game end demo period corresponding to the special game is configured to be the first period.
Entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game executed by stopping and displaying the identification information in the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific game state. If there is a ball, the special game end demo period corresponding to the special game is configured to be the second period.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first period is configured to be longer than the second period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the end demo time value is different (the start demo time value does not change) even if the jackpot is related to the same jackpot symbol, depending on whether or not the ball is entered into the specific area C22. Often, as a concept based on this configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (16) is
Demonstration of the end of the special game when there is a ball in a specific area and when there is no ball in a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured so that the periods are different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the content of the end demo effect is different (the start demo effect is unchanged) even if it is a big hit related to the same big hit symbol, depending on whether or not the ball is entered into the specific area C22. Often, as a concept based on this configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (17) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
A sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
A staging display content control means capable of controlling the staging display content displayed on the staging display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means is provided.
As the state related to the game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state in which the profit is higher than the normal game state.
At the time of executing a certain special game, there are cases where the ball has entered the specific area and cases where the ball has not entered the specific area. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the effects (the continuous villa continuation image and the continuous villa end image), which are the effects during the special game end demo time in the first change from the above, are different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a first main game chief open jackpot (a jackpot that makes it easier to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round on the first main game side) and a second main game chief open jackpot (the first). 2 The tendency of the start demo production is different depending on the big hit) that makes it easier to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round on the main game side. For example, in the first main game chief opening jackpot, "long opening confirmation notification effect (effect of notifying that the second big winning opening C20 is long open in the special game being executed)" and "long opening presence / absence non-notification effect" ( In the special game being executed, two types can be displayed: "A production that does not notify whether the second big winning opening C20 is long-opened or short-opened)", but in the second main game chief-opening jackpot, "long-opening is confirmed. Only one type of "notification effect" can be displayed, that is, the display selection rate of "long open confirmation notification effect" is different), and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (18) is
It has a plurality of types of staging display contents as the staging display contents performed by the staging display unit (for example, the staging display device SG) during the start demo period of the special game.
In the special game start demo period corresponding to the special game when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means is winning and the stop identification information of the first identification information is the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group. The tendency of the effect display content performed by the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) and the result of the pass / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means are winning, and the stop identification information of the second identification information is first specified. It is configured so that the tendency of the effect display content performed by the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) during the special game start demo period corresponding to the special game when the specific stop identification information belongs to the group is different. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by the fact that it is.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a long open jackpot (a jackpot that makes it easier to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round) and a short open jackpot (a jackpot that makes it difficult to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round). The output mode of the external terminal signal at the time of entering the specific area C22 may be different depending on the jackpot), and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (19) is
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
As a special game, there are at least a special game with easy entry and a special game with difficulty in entering a specific area during the execution of the special game rather than the special game with easy entry.
As external output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information and the second information different from the first information can be output.
The first information and the second information are configured to be output when the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the special game.
Easy entry The first information is output when the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the special game.
This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second information is output when the ball enters a specific area during the execution of a special game in which it is difficult to enter the ball.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a shielding member (open state and closed state) by a jackpot symbol, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the specific area C22 in the open state, and it is specified in the closed state. There is a timing in which the opening mode of the member that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the area C22 (a member that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the area C22) is different (it is opened at least once, and it is opened regardless of the jackpot symbol, and there is a specific area from the start timing of the distribution game execution round. The former may be configured such that the time until the opening start timing and the time from the end timing of the distribution game execution round to the closing timing of the specific area are shorter, etc.), and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (20) is
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
A displaceable member provided in the variable winning opening, which is a variable distribution member that is displaced to an obstructing position that hinders entry into the specific area and a non-inhibitory position that does not hinder entry into the specific area. Equipped with
As a special game, it has at least a first special game and a second special game different from the first special game.
Pachinko characterized in that the displacement mode of the distribution variable member (for example, the lower shielding member C25) during the execution of the first special game is different from the displacement mode of the distribution variable member during the execution of the second special game. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the number of counts or the number of prize balls differs depending on the large winning opening, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (21) is
The first variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
Equipped with a second variable winning opening that can be open and closed
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, it is configured to execute a special game in which the first variable winning opening and / or the second variable winning opening may be in an advantageous state for the player.
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. It is configured to execute the unit game to be in the state multiple times.
The predetermined number at which the unit game related to the first variable winning opening ends and the predetermined number at which the unit game related to the second variable winning opening ends are different, or the first variable winning opening is used. The number of prize balls when entering a ball (for example, 15 balls which is the number of prize balls of the first large winning opening in the change example 1 from the second embodiment) and the number of winning balls when entering the second variable winning opening. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be different from (for example, 13 balls, which is the number of prize balls of the second large winning opening in the first modification from the second embodiment).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to continue the round until the distribution game execution round regardless of the big hit, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (22) is
The first variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The second variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the second variable winning opening can enter.
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, it is configured to execute a special game in which the first variable winning opening and / or the second variable winning opening may be in an advantageous state for the player.
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. It is configured to execute the unit game to be in the state multiple times.
As a special game, it has at least a first special game and a second special game in which the number of unit games executed differs from that of the first special game.
In the unit game of the predetermined number of times in the special game (for example, the 4th R which is the distribution game execution round), the second variable winning opening is configured to be open.
In both the first special game and the second special game, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the number of unit games to be executed is configured to be a predetermined number or more.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the time from the end of the round immediately before the distribution game execution round to the start of the distribution game execution round differs between the first main game chief open jackpot and the second main game chief open jackpot. It may be configured so that the tendency of the closing time of the big winning opening is different between the predetermined rounds. In addition, a promotion effect (an effect that incites whether the current jackpot is a long-open jackpot or a short-open jackpot) may be executed in the round before the distribution game execution round, and the concept based on the configuration. as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (23) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
The first variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
The second variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the second variable winning opening can enter.
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
A second identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
If the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is a win, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, and then the first variable winning opening and / Alternatively, it is provided with a special game control means for executing a special game in which the second variable winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player.
Among the special games executed when the result of the first hit / fail determination is winning, the first ball easy special game, which is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during the special game execution, is performed. Have and
Among the special games executed when the result of the second hit / fail determination is winning, the second easy-to-enter special game, which is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during the execution of the special game, is performed. Have and
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. It is configured to execute the unit game to be in the state multiple times.
In the unit game of the predetermined number of times in the special game, the second variable winning opening is configured to open.
From the timing when the last first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening in the unit game immediately before the predetermined number of unit games is changed from the open state to the closed state, the first second in the predetermined number of unit games. When the predetermined unit game preparation period is from the closed state to the open state of the variable winning opening, the predetermined unit game preparation period in the first easy-to-enter special game and the predetermined unit game in the second easy-to-enter special game. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the time value differs from the preparation period.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the first main game chief open jackpot (the jackpot that makes it easier to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round on the first main game side) is the second main game chief open. It may be configured so that there are more short-opening rounds than the jackpot (the jackpot that makes it easier to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round on the second main game side), and the concept based on this configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (24) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
The first variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
The second variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the second variable winning opening can enter.
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
A second identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
If the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is a win, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, and then the first variable winning opening and / Alternatively, it is provided with a special game control means for executing a special game in which the second variable winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player.
Among the special games executed when the result of the first hit / fail determination is winning, the first ball easy special game, which is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during the special game execution, is performed. Have and
Among the special games executed when the result of the second hit / fail determination is winning, the second easy-to-enter special game, which is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during the execution of the special game, is performed. Have and
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. It is configured to execute the unit game to be in the state multiple times.
In the unit game of the predetermined number of times in the special game, the second variable winning opening is configured to open.
From the timing when the last first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening in the unit game immediately before the predetermined number of unit games is changed from the open state to the closed state, the first second in the predetermined number of unit games. When the predetermined unit game preparation period (for example, the distribution game start demo time in the change example 2 from the second embodiment) is set from the closed state to the open state of the variable winning opening, the first ball entry is easy. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the time value is different between the predetermined unit game preparation period in the special game and the predetermined unit game preparation period in the second easy-to-enter special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the average value of the number of execution rounds is the same for the jackpot on the first main game side and the jackpot on the second main game side, and the concept based on this configuration is ,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (25) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
Equipped with a variable winning opening that can be closed and open
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
The second identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means. Prepare,
If the result of the first winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit, the first special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player is executed. Is configured to
If the result of the second winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit, a second special game that can make the variable winning opening an advantageous state for the player is executed. Is configured to
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses.
As the first special game, it has multiple types of special games with different numbers of unit games to be executed.
As the second special game, it has multiple types of special games with different numbers of unit games to be executed.
The feature is that the average number of unit games executed in a plurality of types of first special games and the average number of unit games executed in a plurality of types of second special games are configured to be the same. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example executes a promotion effect in the first main game chief open jackpot in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state, while the second main player in the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state. The promotion effect is not executed in the game chief open jackpot. Further, it may be configured not to execute the promotion effect in the first main game chief open jackpot in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-shortening gaming state, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (26) is
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect indicating the ease of entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22).
In the normal game state and the low probability lottery state, the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means is won, and the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group. When the special game is executed by being played, the specific effect is executed while the special game is being executed, while the specific effect is executed.
In the case of a specific gaming state and a high-probability lottery state, the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means is won, and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that when a special game is executed by being played, the specific effect is not executed during the execution of the special game.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold during the big hit execution. It may be configured so that the ball enters the ball), and the concept based on the configuration is
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (27) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port, and
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied and controls the occurrence of hold.
Control to stop and display the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed in the identification information display unit according to the decision content based on the random number related to the certain hold when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied. Identification information display control means and
Equipped with
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
A staging display content control means capable of controlling the staging display content displayed on the staging display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means is provided.
It is configured to be able to execute a hold look-ahead effect, which is an effect that suggests the feasibility of a special game related to a certain hold.
When the hold look-ahead effect is executed during the special game, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the hold look-ahead effect is executed at the timing after entering the specific area.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is a V-aiming effect (to the specific area C22) in the first main game chief open jackpot (a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round on the first main game side). Launch of the game ball = production that encourages right-handed strike) and V aiming production in the second main game chief open jackpot (big hit that makes it easier to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round on the first main game side) It may be configured so that the production content is different from that (the V aiming effect at the second main game chief open jackpot does not occur in the V aiming effect at the first main game chief open jackpot), and as a concept based on the configuration. teeth,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (28) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
The second identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. Special game control means for executing special games that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
A staging display content control means capable of controlling the staging display content displayed on the staging display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means is provided.
At the time of executing a special game, it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect which is an effect display content related to the ease of entering a specific area.
Among the special games executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination is winning, the first ball-entry easy special game, which is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during the special game execution, is performed. Have and
Among the special games executed when the result of the second hit / fail determination is winning, the second easy-to-enter special game, which is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during the execution of the special game, is performed. Have and
It is configured so that the effect mode of the specific effect executed during the execution of the first easy-to-enter special game and the effect mode of the specific effect executed during the execution of the second easy-to-enter special game are different. It is a pachinko game machine that features.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has one or more ending effects {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive villas during a specific game, the total number of balls obtained during the consecutive villas, all of multiple types of specific effects occur, etc.) A production during a special game or a specific game that is displayed only when the conditions for the combination of The production mode of the production) may be configured to be different (the display may be less noticeable than in other cases), and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (29) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the random number,
Based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
The identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means.
When the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, a special game control means for executing a special game in which the variable winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player, and a special game control means.
Equipped with
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
A staging display content control means capable of controlling the staging display content displayed on the staging display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means is provided.
As the state related to the game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state in which the profit is higher than the normal game state.
It is configured to be able to measure the number of consecutive special games, which is the number of special games executed up to the special game B, which is in the normal game state after the end of the special game, counting from the special game A.
At the time of executing a special game, it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect which is an effect display content related to the ease of entering a specific area.
The production mode of the specific effect during the execution of the special game B in which the number of consecutive special games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, and the production mode of the specific effect during the execution of the special game B in which the number of consecutive special games is less than the predetermined number of times are different. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured to notify the current number of rounds for at least a part of the first main game chief open jackpot, while notifying the current number of rounds for the second main game chief open jackpot. However, as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (30) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
The second identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means. Prepare,
If the result of the first winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit, the first special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player is executed. Is configured to
If the result of the second winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit, a second special game that can make the variable winning opening an advantageous state for the player is executed. Is configured to
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
A staging display content control means capable of controlling the staging display content displayed on the staging display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means is provided.
Among the special games executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination is winning, the first ball-entry easy special game, which is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during the special game execution, is performed. Have and
Among the special games executed when the result of the second hit / fail determination is winning, the second easy-to-enter special game, which is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during the execution of the special game, is performed. Have and
While there are unit games that do not notify the number of running unit games during the execution of the first easy-to-enter special game, the number of running unit games is notified during the execution of the second easy-to-enter special game. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that there is no unit game that does not exist.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be a type 1 type 1 multifunction device and a gaming machine capable of executing a parallel lottery, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (31) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
Equipped with a variable winning opening that can be closed and open
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
The second identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means. Prepare,
Even if the first main game identification information is variablely displayed, the variable display of the second main game identification information can be started, and even if the second main game identification information is variablely displayed, the first main game identification information can be started. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured so that variable display can be started.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the special figure 2 small hit ratio is higher than the special figure 1 small hit ratio (the small hit may be mounted on the special figure 1 or may not be mounted). The concept based on this configuration is
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (32) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member that is attached to a predetermined entry port and can be displaced to an open state and a closed state. A variable member that is easy to enter and is configured to make it more difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined entry port when the ball is displaced to the closed state or is difficult to enter compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
The first main game identification information display unit that can display the first main game identification information,
The second main game identification information display unit that can display the second main game identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the first main game identification information after the first main game identification information is variablely displayed. One main game identification information display control means,
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second main game identification information after the second main game identification information is variablely displayed. (2) Main game identification information display control means and
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, it is variable until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses. It is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game in which the winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed multiple times, and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group. After being displayed, a variable winning opening open game that executes a unit game once that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player until there is a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning opening or a specific period elapses. Special game control means that are feasible,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The probability that the first main game identification information will be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the specific group is higher than the probability that the second main game identification information will be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the specific group. Alternatively, the first main game identification information cannot be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second main game identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. It is a pachinko gaming machine that is characterized by this.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state is relatively short, and the concept based on the configuration is ,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (33) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
The second identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. Special game control means for executing special games that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game It has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The variable display period of the second main game identification information in the normal game state and the low probability lottery state is the variable display period of the second main game identification information in the normal game state and the high probability lottery state. It is configured to be relatively longer than
The variable display period of the second main game identification information in the specific game state and the high-probability lottery state is the variable display period of the second main game identification information in the normal game state and the high-probability lottery state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to take a relatively long time.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has at least a probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state, a non-probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state, and a non-probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. It may be configured to have, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (34) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
The second identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. Special game control means for executing special games that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game It has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
A pachinko game characterized in that, as a combination of game states, there are at least a normal game state and a low-probability lottery state, and a high-probability lottery state and a normal game state and a specific game state and a high-probability lottery state. It is a machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the expected value or base for winning a prize ball per unit time (excluding during a big hit) when the probability fluctuating gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state continue to fire the gaming ball is the most advantageous. It may be configured to be, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (35) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail determination based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
A second identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. Special game control means for executing special games that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game It has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The expected value of the number of prize balls when the game balls are continuously fired in a situation where the special game is not being executed is the high-probability lottery state and the normal game state when the game is in the high-probability lottery state and the normal game state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be relatively higher than when it is not.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol is relatively long except in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, and the concept based on the configuration. as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (36) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
A second identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. Special game control means for executing special games that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game It has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The variable display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and the high-probability lottery state is relatively larger than the variable display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and not in the high-probability lottery state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be short-time.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the difference in the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the difference in the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol caused by the difference in the gaming state are the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol. It may be configured so that the difference between the two is larger, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (37) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
A second identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. Special game control means for executing special games that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game It has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The average value of the variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state, and the average value of the variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state. The average value of the variation display period of the second identification information in the specific game state and the low probability lottery state, and the average value of the variation display period of the second identification information in the specific game state and the high probability lottery state. The difference between the longest mean value and the shortest mean value is the second variation display period difference value (the non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state of the second main game symbol). Mean value of fluctuation time and mean value of fluctuation time in probabilistic fluctuation game state and time shortening game state, mean value of fluctuation time in non-probability fluctuation game state and time reduction gaming state, and probability fluctuation game state and non-time reduction The difference between the longest average value and the shortest average value compared with the average value of the fluctuation time in the gaming state).
The average value of the variation display period of the first identification information in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state, and the average value of the variation display period of the first identification information in the normal game state and the high probability lottery state. The average value of the variation display period of the first identification information in the specific game state and the low probability lottery state, and the average value of the variation display period of the first identification information in the specific game state and the high probability lottery state. The difference between the longest mean value and the shortest mean value is the first variation display period difference value (the non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state of the first main game symbol). Mean value of fluctuation time and mean value of fluctuation time in probabilistic fluctuation game state and time reduction in The difference between the longest average value and the shortest average value compared with the average value of the fluctuation time in the gaming state).
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second variable display period difference value is configured to be larger than the first variable display period difference value.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the time-reduced gaming state can be terminated by winning a small hit (the time-reduced gaming state can be changed to the non-time-reduced gaming state). As a based concept,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (38) is
A start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start port B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state. Then, the game ball can easily or can enter the predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start opening B10), and when it is displaced to the closed state, it is predetermined as compared with the case where it is displaced to the open state. (For example, a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second main game starting port B10).
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), and
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means that controls the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a specific group, whether or not there is a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) is specified. It is possible to execute a variable winning opening open game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is executed once in a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player until the period elapses. Equipped with special game control means,
The variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) has a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state. ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming state after the execution of the variable winning opening opening game is completed becomes the normal gaming state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured.

Even if the same small hit symbol is won, the pachinko gaming machine according to this example can end the time-reduced gaming state only in a specific gaming state (for example, in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-shortening gaming state). While the time-reduced gaming state can be terminated by a small hit, the time-reduced gaming state may not be terminated by a small hit in the non-probability variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state).
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (39) is
A start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined ball entry port (for example, the second main game start port B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and is compared with the case where the member is displaced to the closed state when it is displaced to the open state. Then, the game ball can easily or can enter the predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start opening B10), and when it is displaced to the closed state, it is predetermined as compared with the case where it is displaced to the open state. (For example, a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second main game starting port B10).
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), and
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means that controls the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a specific group, whether or not there is a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) is specified. It is possible to execute a variable winning opening open game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is executed once in a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player until the period elapses. Equipped with special game control means,
The variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) has a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state. ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state after the execution of the variable winning opening opening game is completed becomes the normal game state. It is composed and
In the case of a specific game state and a high-probability lottery state, if the variable winning opening open game is started to be executed, the normal game state and the high-probability lottery state can be obtained after the execution of the variable winning opening open game is completed. Has been
When the variable winning opening open game is started in the specific game state and the low probability lottery state, the normal game state and the low probability lottery state are not set after the execution of the variable winning opening open game is completed. It is a pachinko gaming machine that is characterized by being played.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that whether or not the time-reduced gaming state ends depends on the winning small hit symbol, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (40) is
A start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start port B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state. Then, the game ball can easily or can enter the predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start opening B10), and when it is displaced to the closed state, it is predetermined as compared with the case where it is displaced to the open state. (For example, a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second main game starting port B10).
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
It is provided with an identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information.
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), and
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means that controls the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a specific group, whether or not there is a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) is specified. It is possible to execute a variable winning opening open game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is executed once in a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player until the period elapses. Equipped with special game control means,
The variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) has a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state. ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state after the execution of the variable winning opening opening game is completed becomes the normal game state. It is composed and
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A of the stop display modes belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, the specific condition can be satisfied, while the above-mentioned specific condition can be satisfied.
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B of the stop display modes belonging to the specific group in the specific gaming state, the specific condition is not satisfied. be.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the time-reduced gaming state can be terminated when the small hit symbol on the first main game side is won, while the time is reached when the small hit symbol on the second main game side is won. It may be configured so that the shortened gaming state does not end, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (41) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail determination based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
The second identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. Special game control means for executing special games that can be in an advantageous state,
During the execution of the special game, the unit game is configured to be executed only once so that the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. ,
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
As a variable winning opening open game, the first variable winning opening open game executed when the result of the winning / failing judgment of the first identification information is won, and the case where the result of the winning / failing judgment of the second identification information is won. Has a second variable winning opening open game that is executed in
In the case of a specific game state, when the execution of the first variable winning opening open game is started, it is configured to be in the normal gaming state after the execution of the first variable winning opening open game is completed.
In the case of a specific gaming state, when the execution of the second variable winning opening open game is started, the normal gaming state is not set after the execution of the second variable winning opening opening game is completed. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during a small hit, the big hit is started after the small hit ends, and the concept is based on the configuration. as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (42) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, it is configured to execute a special game or a variable winning opening open game in which the variable winning opening may be in an advantageous state for the player.
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses.
During the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed only once until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. Has been
When a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, the special game is executed after the end of the variable winning opening opening game. It is a pachinko game machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the distribution large winning opening having the specific area C22 is opened in the 1R of the big hit. The number of large winning openings may be one or two, and when there are two large winning openings, one of the two large winning openings may be configured so as not to have the specific area C22. The concept based on this configuration is
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (43) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
The first variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
The second variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the second variable winning opening can enter.
If the result of the winning / failing judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, a special game is executed in which the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player. Equipped with special game control means
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. It is configured to execute the unit game to be in the state multiple times.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second variable winning opening is configured to open when the first unit game in a special game is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has the following board surface configuration.
Near the center of the board: Near the right side of the board: (1) Auxiliary game start port, (2) First main game start port provided with electric accessories, (3) Second main game start Mouth, (4) Grand prize opening (with specific area C22)
(A large winning opening that opens during a small hit may be provided), and the concept based on this configuration is
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (44) is
The first main game start port where the game ball can enter,
The second main game start port where the game ball can enter,
The third main game start port where the game ball can enter,
Auxiliary game start port where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to the third main game start port that can be displaced to the open and closed states, and when displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the third main game start port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy to enter and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the third main game start port when the ball is displaced or cannot enter the ball in the open state as compared with the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with an auxiliary game department that supports the main game
The main game club
The first main game random number acquisition means for acquiring the first main game random number based on the entry into the first main game start port or the third main game start port, and
The first main game win / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first main game random number, and
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first main game identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first main game identification information, and
The first main game identification information display content The first main game identification information display unit controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the first main game identification information is variablely displayed based on the determination by the first main game identification information display content determination means. Game identification information display control means,
The second main game random number acquisition means for acquiring the second main game random number based on the entry into the second main game start port, and
A second main game win / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail determination based on the second main game random number, and
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second main game identification information display content determining means for determining the second main game stop identification information of the second main game identification information, and
The second main game identification information display content The second main game identification information display unit controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the second main game identification information is variablely displayed based on the determination by the second main game identification information display content determination means. Game identification information display control means,
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first main game identification information display unit or the second main game first identification information display unit, and then variable. It is equipped with a special game control means for executing a special game in which the winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player.
Auxiliary game club
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring auxiliary game random numbers triggered by the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port,
Auxiliary game identification information display content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means and determines the stop display mode of the auxiliary game identification information.
Auxiliary game identification information display content After the auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed on the auxiliary game identification information display unit based on the determination by the determination means, the auxiliary game identification information display unit stops and displays the stop display mode of the auxiliary game identification information. Auxiliary game identification information display control means to control
If the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, the variable member is placed within the displacement drive period, which is the period during which the variable member can be displaced after the stop display mode of the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. It is provided with an easy-to-enter ball game determination executing means for executing an easy-to-enter ball game in which the operation of displacing from the closed state to the open state and then displacing to the closed state is performed once or a plurality of times.
As a flow-down route through which the game ball flows down in the game area, it has a first flow-down route and a second flow-down route different from the first flow-down route.
When the game ball flows down the first flow-down route, it is configured to flow down in the vicinity of the first start port.
When the game ball flows down the second flow-down route, it is characterized in that it flows down in the vicinity of the auxiliary game start port, the second start port, the third start port, and the variable winning opening. It is a pachinko game machine.

The specifications of the pachinko gaming machine related to this example are as follows.
(1) It is a ball confirmation machine.
(2) The ratio of long-open jackpots is higher on the second main game side than on the first main game side.
(3) When a ball is entered into the V winning opening with a long open jackpot won in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, the time shortening gaming state is set (or the rate of the time shortening gaming state) after the big hit is completed. Is relatively high)
(4) If a long-open jackpot is won in a probability-variable gaming state and the ball enters the V winning opening during the jackpot, the time-reduced gaming state does not shift (or the time-shortening gaming state shifts) after the jackpot ends. hard)
(5) When the small hit on the first main game side is won in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state, the game shifts to the probability-variable game state and the non-time-reduced game state after the small hit is completed.
It may be configured as follows, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (45) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail determination based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
The second identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means. Prepare,
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. It is configured to perform a special game or a variable winning opening open game that can be in an advantageous state.
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses.
During the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed only once until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. Has been
Among the special games executed when the result of the first hit / fail determination is winning, the first ball easy special game, which is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during the special game execution, is performed. Have and
Among the special games executed when the result of the second hit / fail determination is winning, the second easy-to-enter special game, which is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during the execution of the special game, is performed. Have and
A special game executed when the result of the second winning / failing determination is a winning, rather than a ratio in which the special game executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination is a winning is the first ball entry easy special game. Is configured to have a higher percentage of special games that make it easier to enter the second ball.
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game It has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
If a ball enters a specific area during the execution of a special game, it is configured to be in a high-probability lottery state after the end of the special game.
If you win the first easy-to-enter special game or the second easy-to-enter special game in the normal game state and the low-probability lottery state, and you enter a specific area during the execution of the special game, the special game It is configured to be in a specific game state after the end of the game.
If you win the first easy-to-enter special game or the second easy-to-enter special game in a specific game state and a high-probability lottery state, and you enter a specific area during the execution of the special game, the special game It is configured so that it will not be in a specific game state after the end of the game.
When the result of the first winning / failing determination is a winning and the variable winning opening open game is executed, the normal gaming state and the high-probability lottery state are set after the end of the variable winning opening opening game. It is a pachinko gaming machine that is characterized by this.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is in a state (probability fluctuation game) in which "the expected value of the number of acquired game balls obtained by a small hit before a big hit ≤ the base 1 or more (the number of acquired game balls ≥ the number of launched game balls) with a small hit". The maximum number of balls that can be won by a big hit in a state and a non-time saving game state). For example, if the small hit probability is 98/100 and the big hit probability is 2/100, the small hit is won 49 times on average before the big hit. Therefore, the expected value of the number of acquired game balls for 49 small hits may be configured so as not to exceed the maximum number of balls to be ejected in one big hit in the probability-variable game state and the non-time shortened game state. The concept based on this configuration is
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (46) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
Equipped with
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the random number,
Based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information display unit is provided with an identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed.
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, a special game or a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. Is configured to
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses.
During the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed only once until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. Has been
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game It has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
Among the special games that can be won in the normal game state and the high probability lottery state, the expected value of the number of prize balls is the highest. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the total number of prize balls in the variable winning opening open game that can be won by the time the special game is won is smaller.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to maintain the main game probability change flag (leave it on) during a small hit, but not during a big hit.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (47) is
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, it is configured to execute a special game or a variable winning opening open game in which the variable winning opening may be in an advantageous state for the player.
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses.
During the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed only once until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. Has been
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game It has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
When a special game is executed in a situation where the special game is in a high-probability lottery state, the special game is configured to be in a low-probability lottery state during the execution of the special game.
When a variable winning opening open game is executed in a high-probability lottery state, the pachinko machine is configured to be in a high-probability lottery state during the execution of the variable winning opening open game. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to maintain the main game time reduction flag (leave it on) during a small hit, but not during a big hit.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (48) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
It is a variable member attached to the starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state. When displaced to the closed state, the starting port is equipped with a variable member that is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter compared to the open state.
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, it is configured to execute a special game or a variable winning opening open game in which the variable winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player.
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses.
During the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed only once until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. Has been
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
When a special game is executed in a situation where it is in a specific game state, it is configured to be in a normal game state while the special game is being executed.
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that when a variable winning opening open game is executed in a situation of a specific gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in the specific gaming state during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game. Is.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the "big hit signal", which is an external terminal signal output during a small hit, is output during the small hit start demo time and / / depending on the game state at the time of winning the small hit. Alternatively, the period output during the small hit end demo time may be different (for example, if the small hit is won in the time-reduced game state, the time will be relatively short). As a basic concept,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (49) is
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, the variable winning opening opening game is configured to execute the variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player.
As a gaming state, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is a gaming state that is more profitable than the normal gaming state.
External output information for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside (for example, an external terminal signal related to a small hit in the third modification from the sixth embodiment) can be output.
The external output information is configured to be output when the variable winning opening opening game is executed.
The output period of the external output information output when the variable winning opening open game is executed in the normal gaming state, and the variable winning opening opening game is executed in the specific gaming state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the output period of the external output information output can be different from that of the external output information.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the variable fixed time of the small hit symbol and the variable fixed time of a symbol other than the small hit symbol (for example, a lost symbol) are different, and a concept based on the configuration. as,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (50) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
Equipped with
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the random number,
Based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information display unit is provided with an identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed.
It is configured so that the identification information is not variablely displayed until a fixed variable time elapses after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed.
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, and then a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. And
The variable fixed time related to the stop identification information that triggers the execution of the variable winning opening opening game (for example, the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol) and the stop identification information that does not trigger the execution of the variable winning opening opening game. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the time value is different from the variable fixed time (for example, the variable fixed time related to the jackpot symbol and the lost symbol).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the variable fixed time of the small hit symbol differs depending on whether the small hit symbol on the first main game side or the small hit symbol on the second main game side. As a concept based on
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (51) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
The second identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means. Prepare,
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. It is configured to perform a special game or a variable winning opening open game that can be in an advantageous state.
The first identification information and the second identification information are configured not to be variablely displayed until a fixed variable time elapses after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed.
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second win / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, the variable winning opening can be opened in an advantageous state for the player. It is configured to perform games and is configured to perform games.
Variable fixed time related to the stop identification information when the stop identification information that triggers the execution of the variable winning opening open game is the first identification information (for example, the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol on the first main game side). ) And the variable fixed time related to the stop identification information when the stop identification information that triggers the execution of the variable winning opening opening game is the second identification information (for example, the small hit symbol on the second main game side). (Floating fixed time) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the time values are configured to be different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the variable fixed time of the small hit symbol may differ depending on the gaming state, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (52) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
Equipped with
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the random number,
Based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information display unit is provided with an identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed.
It is configured so that the identification information is not variablely displayed until a fixed variable time elapses after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed.
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, and then a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. And
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game It has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The variable fixed time related to the stop identification information that triggers the execution of the variable winning opening open game in the low probability lottery state, and the stop identification information that triggers the execution of the variable winning opening opening game in the high probability lottery state. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the time value is different from the variable fixed time.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be capable of outputting an external terminal signal corresponding to a variable fixed time, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (53) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
Equipped with
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the random number,
Based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information display unit is provided with an identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed.
It is configured so that the identification information is not variablely displayed until a fixed variable time elapses after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed.
When the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, the variable winning opening opening game which can make the variable winning opening a favorable state for the player is executed. It is configured to be able to output external output information (for example, an external terminal signal related to a small hit) for outputting from a pachinko machine to the outside.
The external output information is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be output when the variable winning opening opening game is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has the following configuration that encourages the player not to execute a right-handed hit in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state, and does not make a profit even if the right-handed hit is executed. It is configured as follows.
(1) The display of the decorative symbol on the second main game side is not executed.
(2) The opening time of the large winning opening in the small hit and the big hit on the second main game side is set to a short time (the opening in the small hit is made short opening, and the launch of the game ball is started at the same time as the opening of the large winning opening. However, it is configured so that it is impossible or difficult to enter the big winning opening. In addition, in the case of a big hit, the game ball does not reach the big winning opening at the timing when it can enter the specific area C22, and it is right-handed. It makes it meaningless to aim for "big hit ⇒ probability fluctuation game state").
(3) The fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in the non-probability variable game state and the game state other than the time shortening game state has 60 patterns in 0 minutes or more and less than 10 minutes (the distribution is close to equal) (right). When you continue to hit, keep the base low compared to left-handed hits, detect fluctuations in the second main game symbol in advance, and prevent the aim of raising the base by letting the ball enter the big winning opening).
(4) A delayed route that delays the flow of the game ball is provided on the right side of the board (the route that is passed when the right-handed hit is executed).
It may be configured as follows, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (54) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
The third starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the third start port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the third starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start port or the third start port, and
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
A second identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. Special game control means for executing special games that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the information related to the first identification information or the second identification information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display unit is provided with an effect display content control means capable of displaying the sub-game identification information.
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game It has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
When the information regarding the first identification information is received, the sub-game identification information based on the first identification information is displayed on the effect display device, while when the information regarding the second identification information is received, the second identification information is displayed. It is configured not to display the sub-game identification information based on the effect display device.
The period during which the variable winning opening is open in the special game and the variable winning opening open game executed when the result of the second winning / failing determination is winning is when the result of the first winning / failing determination is winning. It is configured to be relatively shorter than the period during which the variable winning opening is opened in the special game and the variable winning opening opening game executed in.
If the game ball is launched after the result of the second winning / failing determination is won and the variable winning opening opening game is started, the launched game ball is configured so that it cannot enter the variable winning opening. ,
The variable display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and not in the high-probability lottery state is relative to the variable display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and in the high-probability lottery state. It is configured to be long-term
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have a plurality of types of selection candidates for a variable display period of the second identification information in a normal gaming state and not in a high-probability lottery state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured as one of the following as a countermeasure against fluctuations in the second main gaming symbol.
(1) If the second main game symbol is a big hit or a small hit fluctuation and the first main game symbol wins a big hit or a small hit during the fluctuation, the second main game symbol is stopped at the same time as the first main game symbol is stopped. Display (forced stop) the lost symbol.
or,
(2) If the first main game symbol is a big hit or a small hit fluctuation and the second main game symbol wins a big hit or a small hit during the fluctuation, the first main game symbol is stopped at the same time as the second main game symbol is stopped. Suspend fluctuations.
It may be configured as follows, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (55) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
Equipped with a variable winning opening that can be closed and open
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first random number,
Based on the result of the first hit / fail determination, the first identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the first identification information, and
The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second hit / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail judgment based on the second random number,
Based on the result of the second hit / fail determination, the second identification information display content determining means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information, and the second identification information display content determining means.
The second identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means.
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is used by the player. Special game control means for executing special games that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
Even if the first identification information is variable display, the variable display start condition of the second identification information can be satisfied, and even if the second identification information is variable display, the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be possible and
If the stop identification information of the first identification information that the result of the first hit / fail judgment is won is stopped and displayed during the variable display of the second identification information that the result of the second hit / fail judgment is winning, the second The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the pachinko gaming machine is configured to change the stop identification information of the identification information to the stop identification information of the second identification information in which the result of the second hit / fail determination is non-winning and display the stop.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the auxiliary game winning probability is not 0 regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine is in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, or in the probability fluctuating gaming state and the time shortening gaming state.
When a big hit is made in a non-probability variable game state and a non-time shortened game state, the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the big hit starts, and the auxiliary game symbol change stops and the auxiliary game is won after the big hit starts. The opening time of the accessory is a relatively short opening time.
When a big hit is made in a non-probability variable game state and a non-time shortened game state, the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the start of the small hit, and the auxiliary game symbol change is stopped and the auxiliary game is won after the start of the small hit. , The opening time of the electric accessory is a relatively short opening time.
When a big hit is made in the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state, if the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the big hit starts, and the auxiliary game symbol change stops and the auxiliary game is won after the big hit starts, the electric accessory The opening time is a relatively short opening time.
When a big hit is made in the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state, the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the start of the small hit, and the auxiliary game symbol change is stopped and the auxiliary game is won after the start of the small hit. The opening time of the accessory may be configured to be a relatively long opening time, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (56) is
A main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when the variable member is displaced to the open state, the predetermined entry port (for example, for example). The game ball can enter the second main game start port B10) more easily than the ball can enter or is closed, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball as compared with the inability to enter or the open state.
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, specific area C22) where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
A main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying main game identification information, and
Auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with an auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
A main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), and
Based on the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to changely display the main game identification information and then stop and display it. Main game identification information display control means and
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20)? Alternatively, it is possible to execute a special game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is executed a plurality of unit games that can be in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined period elapses. , After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a specific group, there is a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). Or, a variable winning opening open game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is executed once in a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player until a specific period elapses. Equipped with a special game control means that is feasible,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring auxiliary game random numbers triggered by the entry of a game ball into an auxiliary game start port (for example, auxiliary game start port H10).
A hit / fail judgment is executed based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and the auxiliary game identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g), and then stopped. Auxiliary game identification information display control means to control
When the winning / failing determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is won, it is a period during which the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. Within the displacement drive period, the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and then displaced to the closed state one or more times. Equipped with an easy entry ball game determination execution means to execute an easy entry ball game,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific gaming state that is easy to open,
Under the situation where the winning / failing judgment result based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the normal game state. As a result, the special game is executed, and when the auxiliary game identification information that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed during the execution of the special game, a variable member (for example, an easy-to-enter ball game based on the stop display) is displayed. The period during which the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is open is configured to be relatively short.
Under the situation where the winning / failing judgment result based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the normal game state. As a result, the variable winning opening open game is executed, and if the auxiliary game identification information that was displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, the easy entry ball game based on the stop display is performed. The variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is configured to be in an open state for a relatively short period of time.
Under the situation where the winning / failing judgment result based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the specific game state. As a result, the special game is executed, and when the auxiliary game identification information that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed during the execution of the special game, a variable member (for example, an easy-to-enter ball game based on the stop display) is displayed. The period during which the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is open is configured to be relatively short.
Under the situation where the winning / failing judgment result based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is variablely displayed, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group when the specific game state is set. As a result, when the variable winning opening open game is executed and the auxiliary game identification information that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, the easy-entry ball game based on the stop display is performed. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is configured to be in an open state for a relatively long period of time.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is small to the final fluctuation of the probability-variable gaming state and the time-shortening gaming state or the non-probability-variable gaming state and the time-shortening gaming state (for example, the 100th rotation after shifting to the time-shortening gaming state). If you win,
(1) When the hit symbol is stopped, the game shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state.
Or,
(2) After the small hit game is completed, the game shifts to a non-probability variable game state and a non-time shortened game state.
It may be configured as either of the above, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (57) is
A main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when the variable member is displaced to the open state, the predetermined entry port (for example, for example). The game ball can enter the second main game start port B10) more easily than the ball can enter or is closed, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball as compared with the inability to enter or the open state.
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, specific area C22) where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
Main game identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B) capable of displaying main game identification information
21g) and
Auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with an auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
A main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), and
Based on the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to changely display the main game identification information and then stop and display it. Main game identification information display control means and
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20)? Alternatively, it is possible to execute a special game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is executed a plurality of unit games that can be in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined period elapses. , After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a specific group, there is a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). Or, a variable winning opening open game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is executed once in a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player until a specific period elapses. Equipped with a special game control means that is feasible,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring auxiliary game random numbers triggered by the entry of a game ball into an auxiliary game start port (for example, auxiliary game start port H10).
A hit / fail judgment is executed based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and the auxiliary game identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g), and then stopped. Auxiliary game identification information display control means to control
When the winning / failing determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is won, it is a period during which the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. Within the displacement drive period, the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and then displaced to the closed state one or more times. Equipped with an easy entry ball game determination execution means to execute an easy entry ball game,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific gaming state that is easy to open,
If a ball enters a specific area during the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the special game is configured to be executed after the end of the variable winning opening opening game.
The variable display of the main game identification information is set as one unit from the start to the stop display, and in the case of a specific game state, after the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be controllable so as to be in the normal game state. And
After the execution of the special game is completed, the specific game state is set, and the variable winning opening is opened by stopping and displaying the stop display mode belonging to the specific group as the stop display mode of the main game identification information before the final round of the specific game state. When a game is executed, it is configured to maintain a specific game state during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game.
After the execution of the special game is completed, the game becomes a specific game state, and the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the main game identification information which is the final round of the specific game state. When executed, it is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be in a normal gaming state during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game.
again,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (55) is
A main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when the variable member is displaced to the open state, the predetermined entry port (for example, for example). The game ball can enter the second main game start port B10) more easily than the ball can enter or is closed, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entry port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball as compared with the inability to enter or the open state.
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, specific area C22) where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
A main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying main game identification information, and
Auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with an auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
A main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), and
Based on the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to changely display the main game identification information and then stop and display it. Main game identification information display control means and
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20)? Alternatively, it is possible to execute a special game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is executed a plurality of unit games that can be in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined period elapses. , After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a specific group, there is a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). Or, a variable winning opening open game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) is executed once in a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player until a specific period elapses. Equipped with a special game control means that is feasible,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring auxiliary game random numbers triggered by the entry of a game ball into an auxiliary game start port (for example, auxiliary game start port H10).
A hit / fail judgment is executed based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and the auxiliary game identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g), and then stopped. Auxiliary game identification information display control means to control
When the winning / failing determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is won, it is a period during which the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. Within the displacement drive period, the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and then displaced to the closed state one or more times. Equipped with an easy entry ball game determination execution means to execute an easy entry ball game,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) are more variable than the normal game state. ) Has a specific gaming state that is easy to open,
If a ball enters a specific area during the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the special game is configured to be executed after the end of the variable winning opening opening game.
The variable display of the main game identification information is set as one unit from the start to the stop display, and in the case of a specific game state, after the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be controllable so as to be in the normal game state. And
After the execution of the special game is completed, the specific game state is set, and the variable winning opening is opened by stopping and displaying the stop display mode belonging to the specific group as the stop display mode of the main game identification information before the final round of the specific game state. When a game is executed, it is configured to maintain a specific game state during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game.
After the execution of the special game is completed, the game becomes a specific game state, and the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the main game identification information which is the final round of the specific game state. When executed, it is in a specific gaming state during the execution of the variable winning opening open game, and is configured to be in the normal gaming state when the execution of the variable winning opening open game is completed. It may be a pachinko gaming machine characterized by.

The following specifications apply to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example.
(1) One kind one kind small hit V.
(2) There is one or more special figure 2 reservations (0 in the modified example).
(3) Sequential digestion by entering the ball (a modified example is special figure 1 priority digestion).
(4) The number of working hours differs depending on the jackpot symbol (the conditions for ending the working hours differ).
(5) In the case of the jackpot symbol A in the low-low state, the time reduction ends when the special figure 2 fluctuation is 10 times or the special figure 2 fluctuation + the special figure 1 fluctuation is 30 times.
(6) In the case of the jackpot symbol B in the low-low state, the time reduction ends when the special figure 2 fluctuation + the special figure 1 fluctuation is 100 times.
(7) In the case of the jackpot symbol A in the low and high state, the time reduction ends when the special figure 2 fluctuation + the special figure 1 fluctuation is 100 times.
(8) The special figure 1 big hit fluctuation in the low and high state (shifted after the first hit) is relatively longer than the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation.
As a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (58) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
It is a variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is compared with the closed state. A variable member that is easy and is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state or compared to the open state.
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
It has a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter.
The first main game random number acquisition means for acquiring the first main game random number based on the entry into the first main game start port, and
The first main game win / fail determination means for executing the first hit / fail determination based on the first main game random number, and
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first hold is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit identifies the first according to the first hit / fail judgment result based on the first random number related to the first hold. The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the first identification information after the information is displayed in a variable manner,
A second main game win / fail determination means that executes a second hit / fail determination based on the second main game random number, and
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit performs the second identification according to the second hit / fail judgment result based on the second random number related to the second hold. A second identification information display control means that controls the stop display of the second identification information after the information is displayed in a variable manner,
When the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is winning, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first main game identification information display unit or the second main game first identification information display unit, and then variable. It is provided with a special game control means for executing a special game or a variable winning opening open game that can make the winning opening advantageous to the player.
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses.
During the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed only once until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. Has been
Of the first hold and the second hold, it is configured to satisfy the variable display start condition in order from the first identification information or the second identification information related to the first hold or the second hold that occurs earlier.
If a ball enters a specific area during the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the special game is configured to be executed after the end of the variable winning opening opening game.
As a gaming state regarding the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal gaming state.
The total number of repetitions of the first identification information and the second identification information in the specific gaming state is the total number of repetitions of the first identification information or the second identification information. After reaching a predetermined number of times A or a predetermined number of times B, it is configured to be controllable so as to be in a normal gaming state.
The predetermined number of times A is configured to be a value larger than the predetermined number of times B.
The variable display of the second identification information is set as one unit from the start to the stop display, and in the case of a specific gaming state, after the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches the specific number of times, it is configured to be controllable so as to be in the normal gaming state. And
As a special game, it has at least a first special game and a second special game which is a special game different from the first special game.
When the first special game is executed in the normal game state and the specific game state is reached after the end of the first special game, the first identification information and the second identification information are used after the end of the first special game. It is configured to be in a normal gaming state when the total number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number B, or when the number of repetitions of the one unit of the second identification information reaches a specific number of times.
When the second special game is executed in the normal game state and the specific game state is reached after the end of the second special game, the first identification information and the second identification information are used after the end of the second special game. It is configured to be in a normal gaming state when the total number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number of times A.
When the first special game is executed in the specific game state and the specific game state is reached after the end of the first special game, the first identification information and the second identification information are used after the end of the first special game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in a normal gaming state when the total number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number of times A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big hit and a decorative symbol indicating a small hit. The former has the same decorative symbol combination pattern even if the gaming state is different, but the latter It may be configured to be a combination pattern of different decorative patterns, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (59) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the random number,
Based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
The identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means.
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, a special game or a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. Equipped with special game control means,
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the information related to the identification information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display unit is provided with an effect display content control means capable of displaying the sub-game identification information.
As a gaming state, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is a gaming state that is more profitable than the normal gaming state.
When the information related to the identification information is received, the sub-game identification information based on the identification information is displayed on the effect display device.
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses.
During the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed only once until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. Has been
The display mode of the sub-game identification information based on the identification information that triggers the execution of the special game displayed in the normal game state, and the identification information that triggers the execution of the special game displayed in the specific game state. It is configured to have the same display mode as the display mode of the sub-game identification information based on.
The display mode of the sub-game identification information based on the identification information that triggers the execution of the variable winning opening opening game displayed in the normal gaming state, and the variable winning opening opening game displayed in the specific gaming state are executed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have a display mode different from the display mode of the sub-game identification information based on the identification information that serves as an opportunity.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, among the notice effects executed before the reach effect is executed in the reach fluctuation, there seems to be more types of notice effects that deny small hits than types of notice effects that deny big hits. It may be configured, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (60) is
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the random number,
Based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information display unit is provided with an identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the stop identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed.
If the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, a special game or a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. Is configured to
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses.
During the execution of the variable winning opening open game, the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player is executed only once until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. Has been
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
A staging display content control means capable of controlling the staging display content displayed on the staging display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means is provided.
As the effect display content, a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, the advance notice effects shown in FIG. 107), which are effects suggesting the feasibility of a special game or a variable winning opening opening game related to the identification information being displayed in a variable manner, can be executed. And
The feature is that the number of types of advance notice effects that make it definite that the variable winning opening opening game will not be executed is larger than the number of types of advance notice effects that make it definite that the special game will not be executed. It is a pachinko game machine.

Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 3, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate D20 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, and extracting the game ball from the lower ball plate D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball plate D20 and the lower ball plate D22, and sound effects according to the game state and the like are output.

Next, the game board is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In the game area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the auxiliary game start port H10, 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out opening D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information.

Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is variable to a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than in the normal state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and the game flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured so that it is easy to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. .. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched on the right side and the left side, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game start port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game start port A10 side. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 are arranged. 2 It may be arranged so as to overlap with the main game start port B10, and in that case, the upper part of the second main game start port B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start port A10. You may.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side and the left side (reference to the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is configured to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. {However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is likely to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (center of the game area). The game ball flowing down the reference) may be configured so as not to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10}.

Next, above the out opening D36, a first big winning opening C10 and a second big winning opening C20 are provided, and a game ball flowing down the right side or the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). Is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is an out opening that opens when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops the big hit symbol. It is a winning slot corresponding to the main game, which is located above D36. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and the first large winning opening). The mouth solenoid C13) is provided. Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 The big winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and changed). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advanced state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). A tongue-type attacker) or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a big winning opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). , It is suitable when it is desired to guarantee that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape and is out, which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the opening D36. As a specific configuration, the second major winning opening C20 includes a second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second major winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second major winning opening). The mouth solenoid C23) is provided. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second major winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second major winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second major winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second major winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easily won. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advanced state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). A tongue-type attacker) or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a big winning opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). , It is suitable when it is desired to guarantee that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display a maximum of four holding numbers (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held). Number 1: Lighting, Number of Holds 2: Low-speed blinking, Number of Holds 3: Medium-speed blinking, Number of Holds 4: High-speed blinking).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a staging role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, when a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a staging role and the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is not displayed, the effect described later is used. A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) that displays main game hold information, and, for example, a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol fluctuations that imitate a game of a slot machine. It has a decorative symbol display area SG11 and a display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of reserved auxiliary game symbol changes (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays a role of staging by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and controls the overall gaming operation (that is, the game, such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10). The main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the pachinko machine, and the effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that gives interest to the game content. The SM, the sub-sub control unit SS that mainly executes the effect display, the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the prizes to each prize opening are placed on the upper ball plate D20. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE equipped with a payout unit KE10 or the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reservoir ball) of the upper ball plate D20. Turn on the power of the launching device D42 that launches one ball at a time to the area D30, the launching control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, the power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine. A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch for turning off, is provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the sound from the speaker D24. The sub-control board S that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc. (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) and these. It is mainly composed of a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire game machine including a control board. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. It is provided with two control units, a sub-sub control unit SS, which executes display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.). Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board / device will be outlined.

First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting opening ball entry detection device A11s, second main game starting opening entry ball detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, first. 1 big prize opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (not shown, the general winning opening is a entry opening that has a prize ball but does not perform a symbol lottery. )}, Drive solenoid (not shown), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to the input / output devices that are indispensable for the game, and controls the progress of the game based on the input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the prize ball payout control board KH can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal by wiring. It is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main are configured. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used as the communication method). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of the game ball, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a request for lending the game ball to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, launching motor, ball feeding device) are provided. Etc.) are also connected. In this embodiment, the gaming ball lending device R is separated from the gaming machine and adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. In that case, the gaming ball lending control board KH is used for lending. Control and management control of recording media for lending such as electronic money may be supervised.

Next, as described above, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying decorative patterns and the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other drive devices for effect (not shown). .. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Illuminations) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of the display content to be displayed on the staging display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the staging display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured in. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, by configuring it to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Further, the division of work between both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H). It is connected to the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM) related to the production and the prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes the image effect, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), the speaker D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM), the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of ROMs and RAMs to be used, elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. It should be noted that each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in the peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each of the above means (devices) will be described.

The scope of the claims and the "random numbers" in the present specification are, for example, "0" to "65535" and "0" to "0" to "random numbers" assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a random number for determining a variation mode). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "255". Further, the random number does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the values are expressed in sequence along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) Is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination thereof, and the like.

Further, the limited frequency means that the type and / or selectivity of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state different from the type and / or selectivity (limited frequency state).

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) for managing first and second main game symbol fluctuations that can be cleared to zero. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B for measuring the drive (opening) time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. is doing. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a probability variation number counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number and a time reduction number counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction number. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability fluctuation game in which the lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in the normal game. Point to.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) during the time reduction game as compared with the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10 is relatively extended (opening time extension function). Further, the time shortening game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes of the first main game symbol and the number of changes of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times. That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Even if the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has, for example, a function of performing a transition lottery from a specific game (for example, a probability-changing game or a time-shortening game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time the symbol changes. Good (in the case of a so-called pachinko machine with a fall lottery function).

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripherals include the first main game peripheral device A, which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, the second main game peripheral device B, which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and the first main game side. And the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and the sub-sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM includes the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time-synchronized manner in the result of the game. It is related to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers a special game transition, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers a special game transition, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C are in the closed state during normal games, and are in the open state under predetermined conditions during special games (big hits). And has a second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H has an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of

Here, the design variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative symbol.

Next, the stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to count how many times the main game symbol has changed in the specific game state from the end of the special game in order to switch the effect stage. Further, the consecutive villa number counter SM23c2 is configured to count the number of times a big hit is continuously won during a continuous specific game.

Next, the look-ahead effect execution counter SM26c is configured to manage the progress of the hold look-ahead effect when the hold look-ahead effect is executed over a plurality of variations of the main game symbol.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variablely displaying the decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying the main game hold information. ing.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS controls the sub-game. Means (sub-main control unit) It means that it is controlled by SM. It should be noted that it may be configured to control another peripheral device via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process of the figure (a) is executed. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the initial setting is performed (not shown), in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and the reset button of the power supply unit E (not shown). It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation for intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the administrator of the game hall or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set in step 1008.
The contents of the RAM area in the main control board M are checked (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure is compared with the amount of information stored in the RAM area). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. do. If Yes, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal in step 1010, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M at the time of power failure. Various information commands of the above are acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the commands may be set at the relevant timing and described later. It may be configured to be transmitted by the control command transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the figure (b) is executed}, and the process in step 1018 is performed. Transition. After step 1018, the CPU MC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment processes) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. .. Next, in step 1200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M (particularly, the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs the prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the prize opening in which the game ball has won a prize. The prize ball payout control board KH is made to execute, and the process for managing the result, etc.) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an output process of an external signal (information output to an external terminal board, a hall computer H, or the like). Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit SM side), and immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Returns to the processing that was being executed in.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power cutoff signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the process shown in FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1020, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the power cut information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. .. Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, C of the main control board M
The PUMC determines whether or not the game ball has entered (inflowed, passed in the case of a gate) into the auxiliary game starting port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding sphere in a form of temporarily storing the random number in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information on the number of holdings. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). In the case of No in step 1102 and step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag), and the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side and the relevant game state. Auxiliary game symbol based on the reserved ball The stop symbol is determined based on the random number (for example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and the main control board. Temporarily stored in the RAM area of M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the same table, in this example, the stop symbols are "D0, D1, D2", and the stop symbols that are the hit symbols are "D1, D2", which are caused by the fact that each of them has stopped. In the non-time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (opening → closing for 0.2 seconds), and the electric accessory is stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 0.8 seconds → opening for 5.0 seconds, closing) (maximum opening). Further, in the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed) and stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → closed). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time reduction game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time reduction game.

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol change time to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the timer for auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management. After starting MP11t-H, the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. do.
Then, in step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a "hit" (D1 and D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens for 1 second → closes for 1 second in the opening mode (for example, in the case of the hit symbol “D1”, based on the hit symbol on the auxiliary game side. → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed open mode, 0.2 second open, 0.8 second closed, 5 second open in the case of the winning symbol “D2”) Determine and set a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening and closing time) of the electric accessory. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. Next, in step 1238, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1239, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1239, in step 1240, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the information that the longest opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is started, that is, the longest electric accessory to the sub side. The release start command is set, and the process proceeds to step 1242. In this embodiment, when the main game time reduction flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time for continuing to open the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is the longest. Has been done.

Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in steps 1244 and 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10 and sets the electric accessory opening flag. Turn off. Next, in step 1248, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command to end the longest opening of the electric accessory to the sub side, which is information to the effect that the longest opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d has been completed. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, step 1238, step 1239 and step 1242, No. In that case, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable).

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port entry information has been received from the first main game start opening entry detection device A11s of the first main game start opening A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the main game (particularly the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / failing lottery random number for determining the winning / failing, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for the purpose are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends the information (hold generation command) to the effect that the first main game random number has been acquired to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

Next, in step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start opening ball entry information from the second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s of the second main game start opening B10. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the main game (particularly the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a win / fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the case of the first main game content determination means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the winning / failing lottery random number for the first main game and the winning / failing lottery random number for the second main game). Is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random numbers in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends the information (hold generation command) to the effect that the second main game random number has been acquired to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). If No in step 1302 and 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312, and if No in steps 1312 and 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

In this embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320, but the information on the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. It may be transmitted with a hold number, and it is also possible to substitute this information as information indicating that a random number has been acquired.

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {processes of steps 1400 (1) and (2). }. On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {steps 1400 (1), (2). Process}.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the second main game symbol exists, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game symbol). (Even if) is configured to prioritize the hold digestion of the second main game symbol, but it is not limited to this (hold digestion based on the winning order and simultaneous parallel of both main game symbols). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery to draw a lot).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is a condition that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbol is not changing, and the main game symbol is held. Although not shown in this example, when a variable fixed time (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, the variable start condition of the next fluctuation is set during the variable fixed time. It may be configured not to satisfy.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the first main game content determination random number related to the current symbol variation ( The second main game content determination random number) is read, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is stored. Shift (pending digestion process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol winning / failing lottery based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number). do.

Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game winning / failing lottery table (second main game winning / failing lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this.

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). The stop symbols related to the main game symbol are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B"). One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. May}. In the present embodiment, the average number of big hit rounds related to the second main game side (8R × 700/1024 + 16R × 324/1024 = 10.5R) is higher than the average number of big hit rounds related to the first main game side (8R × 700/1024 + 16R × 324/1024 = 10.5R). 8R x 400/1024 + 16R x 624/1024 = 12.9R), so one symbol change on the second main game side is more advantageous than one symbol change on the first main game side. It has become. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the average number of big hit rounds related to the first main game side and the average number of big hit rounds related to the second main game side may be configured to be the same. Further, the average value of the number of rounds actually executed is configured to be the same for the jackpot on the first main game side and the jackpot on the second main game side, but the average value of the actual number of rounds is the jackpot on the second main game side. The player may be configured to be larger than the jackpot on the first main game side. Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which it is easy to enter a game ball until the specified count is reached, which means that the large winning opening is closed by opening for a long time (for example, 20 seconds or more). Actually, it is a special game of 15 rounds, but if the opening for a long time (for example, 20 seconds or more) is 8 rounds and the opening for a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is 7 rounds, the relevant case is concerned. The actual number of rounds of the special game is 8 rounds.

Next, in step 1411, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1411, in other words, in the case of a normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state), in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result and the first. The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. The process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 3) is an example of a lottery table for determining a first main game variation mode (a lottery table for determining a second main game variation mode). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the main game symbol. That is, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but is configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. Needless to say, it's good. Further, it may be configured so that the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side is relatively long in the time shortening game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) {the symbol on the second main game side. When the variation is configured to be advantageous to the player, the second main game side is likely to be put on hold by lowering the symbol variation efficiency of the first main game side (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, in other words, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency variation mode determination process described later in step 1450. Next, in step 1413, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c by 1, and proceeds to step 1414. Further, the process of step 1413 may be configured to be executed immediately after the result of Yes in step 1420 (timing when the fluctuation time ends).

Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. The command related to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag and proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550).

Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M is for command transmission for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation is completed to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

Next, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter. In this example, it is configured to shift to a specific game state (processing of a probability-variable game state with a limited number of times and a time-shortened game state) after the end of the special game related to all the jackpot symbols. Next, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and determines whether or not the counter value G is a value within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50). In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the winning / failing lottery, and next processing (step). 1413 process).

Here, FIG. 14 (limited frequency table 1) is an example of the lottery table MN52ta for determining the limited frequency variation mode. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 50). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. Compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average fluctuation time. Further, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

On the other hand, if No in step 1452, in step 1456, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is a value within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol based on the random number on the main game side, the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the number of reserved balls on the second main game side. ) Is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413).

Here, FIG. 14 (limited frequency table 2) is an example of the lottery table MN52ta for determining the limited frequency variation mode. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50 ≧ G> 10). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. Compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time. Further, in the limited frequency table 2, the average fluctuation time is shorter when there are two or three reserved balls than when there are zero or one reserved balls.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1456, in other words, when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the third stage range (10 ≧ G), in step 1460, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a random number on the main game side. , The variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined based on the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413).

Here, FIG. 14 (limited frequency table 3) is an example of the lottery table MN52ta for determining the limited frequency variation mode. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is in a predetermined range (10 ≧ G). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the variable time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 is only one type, and it is constant regardless of the winning / losing lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

The contents of the limited frequency table are not limited to this, and the contents of the limited frequency table referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side only in a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). It may be configured to be the same. Further, in a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of reservations (on both the first main game side and the second main game side). If such a configuration is not made, the first main game side selects a variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holdings, and the second main game side selects the number of holdings when the number of holdings is a predetermined number or more. It is desirable to configure the fluctuation time to be relatively shorter than when the number is less than a predetermined number.

In this embodiment, there are three types of limited frequency tables, and the configuration is such that the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3 is switched in the order of three stages (so-called three-stage ST), but this is limited. No matter how many types of limited frequency tables are used, there is no problem even if the order of the referenced tables is changed. Further, it has two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and the table to be referred to is switched in the order of limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 1 as a mode of three-stage ST. May be good.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c by 1. In the case of Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag and proceeds to step 1510. Even if No in step 1502 or step 1506, the process proceeds to step 1510.

Next, in step 1510, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUM of the main control board M
C turns off the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550). In addition, even if No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time saving flag, auxiliary game time saving flag). Next, in step 1556, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1558, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is started to the sub-main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. If No in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is just before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes). do. Next, in step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening C20). The first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. do. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning games balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is applied to the first winning opening C10 (or the second winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (ball). If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special gaming timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the large winning opening. Determines whether or not has passed. In the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening C20). 1st big winning opening C10 (or 2nd big winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special gaming timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). .. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information to the effect that the special game is ended (special game end display instruction command) to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1930). Then, in step 1650, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 27. First, FIG. 19 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, and when various information commands are received → Reset the effect-related information at the time of power failure to the RAM on the sub side). After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (f) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed. Here, when (f) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. (F), first, in step 2050, the CPUSC of the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM is set to the stay stage described later. Execute the decision process. Next, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the hold information management process described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this iterative process routine. do.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (S2050 to S2900) are looped after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 3E is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal), this is the processing flow (e). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the input port of the data signal line. Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the main interrupt process. Returns to the processing that was being executed in.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the specific game has started on the main side (in this example, the game has shifted to the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state). In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the specific game executing flag, and proceeds to step 2066.

Here, the specific game executing flag is a flag indicating that the specific game is in a specific game (for example, a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state, so-called ST), and is turned on when the specific game starts. , The value of the jackpot or stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to be turned off when the upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of ST) is exceeded.

On the other hand, if No in step 2052, in step 2058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the specific game has ended {for example, determining or staying with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. It is determined whether the value of the stage management counter SM23c exceeds the upper limit value (for example, 80 which is the upper limit number of ST)}. In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets (clears zero) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the specific game executing flag. Next, in step 2064, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a counter for the number of consecutive villas SM23c2 (a counter that counts the number of consecutive big hits during a specific game, and the value is added in the process of step 2410 described later. ) Is reset (zero clear), and the process proceeds to step 2066. Even if No in step 2058, the process proceeds to step 2066.

Next, in step 2066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2066, in step 2068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S newly determines whether or not the main game symbol has stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2068, in step 2070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to (increments) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2072. On the other hand, if No in step 2068, the process proceeds to step 2072 without executing the process of step 2070.

Next, in step 2072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the counter value is within the first range (1 to 30). In the case of Yes in step 2072, in step 2074, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a “short staging stage” as a stay stage (temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and the next process (step 2100). Process).

On the other hand, if No in step 2072, in step 2076, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is within the second range (31 to 70). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2076, in step 2078, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the “long staging stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the RAM area), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2100). ..

On the other hand, if No in step 2076, in step 2080, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is within the third range (71 to 80). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2080, in step 2082, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a “fixed effect stage” as a stay stage (temporarily stored in the RAM area), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2100). .. Even if No in step 2066 and step 2080 (for example, when the specific game is not in progress), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2100).

In this embodiment, the third stage (fixed effect stage) has only one type of mode (5 seconds in this example) and one type of effect content (in this example, pre-reading) regardless of the result of the lottery. Although the display content is different at the time of non-look-ahead, the system is only a fixed time effect), but a plurality of variation modes and effect contents may be provided. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the number of types of effect contents in the third stage is smaller than that in the second stage (long effect stage). As a tendency, it is desirable that the number of types of the fluctuation pattern and the staging content is "second stage> first stage> third stage".

With this configuration, it is possible to switch the stay stage for determining the effect content based on the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c that counts the number of symbol fluctuations during the specific game.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new electric accessory longest opening start command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in other words, when the longest opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is started, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the flag for the longest opening of the electric accessory. Turn it on and proceed to step 2110. On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new electric accessory longest opening end command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2106, in other words, when the longest opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is completed, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the flag of the electric accessory longest opening. Then, the process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, even if No in step 2106, the process proceeds to step 2110.

Here, the longest opening flag of the electric accessory is the period during which the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is opened (maximum opening) in the opening mode in which the time for continuing to open at one time is the longest. It is a flag that is turned on, and the hold that occurred when the longest open flag of the electric accessory is on is used to determine that the hold is based on the entry of the game ball that is open for the longest time. Is a flag. In the present embodiment, the flag for the longest opening of the electric accessory is turned on only during the non-time reduction game.

Next, in step 2110, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a new hold generation command (hold information related to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing hold counter (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game and a maximum of 4 for the second main game). 1 ”is added (incremented). Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a hold information (particularly, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, a win / fail lottery) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. Random numbers / symbol lottery random numbers / variation mode lottery random numbers) are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the electric accessory longest opening flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2116, in step 2118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the hold temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S is the hold on the second main game side. .. In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S indicates that the hold information newly temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S is the hold generated at the time of the longest opening of the electric accessory. Information is added, and the process proceeds to step 2122. On the other hand, if No in step 2116 or 2118, the process proceeds to step 2122 without executing the process of step 2120.

Next, in step 2122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S preliminarily determines the result of each hold based on the hold information (particularly, the winning / failing lottery random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a hold that is a winning (big hit) among the holds that are digested before the new hold, based on the preliminary determination result. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2124, in step 2150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the look-ahead effect execution determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2142. On the other hand, if No in step 2124, the process proceeds to step 2142 without executing the process of step 2150. Next, in step 2142, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S makes full use of the effect display means SS to hold the drawing on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13). The hold display lamps having the same number as the counter value are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200).

On the other hand, if No in step 2110, in step 2130, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2130, in step 2132, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing hold counter. Next, in step 2134, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the hold information related to the symbol variation and the remaining hold information.

Next, in step 2136, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the digested hold is a hold that occurred when the electric accessory was opened to the maximum. In the case of Yes in step 2136, in step 2138, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the effect permission flag for holding at the longest opening, and proceeds to step 2140. On the other hand, if No in step 2136, the process proceeds to step 2140 without executing the process of step 2138. In addition, the effect for holding at the longest opening occurs (or occurs only when the symbol related to the entry is changed when the ball enters the second main game start port electric accessory B11d at the time of the longest opening of the electric accessory. It is an effect (easy to perform), and examples thereof include a change in the hold display mode and a change in the selected effect content (change in the background and the notice content).

Next, in step 2140, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2142. If No in step 2130, the process proceeds to step 2142 without executing the processes of steps 2132 to 2140, the hold display process is executed, and then the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). do.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the look-ahead staging execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the newly generated hold is a hold on the second main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored) is the “long staging stage”.

In the case of Yes in step 2156, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is newly held based on the hold information (particularly, the random number for determining the variation mode) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. The fluctuation time of is determined in advance. Next, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is determined that the fluctuation time of the new hold will be a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or more. Here, when determining the fluctuation time in advance, for example, when the fluctuation mode random value of the new hold is 900 to 1023, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds or more regardless of the number of holds at the time of the new hold digestion. It can be determined that this is the case (see FIG. 12).

In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that is a big hit (for example, it is determined based on a winning / failing lottery random number). In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pre-reading effect lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, if No in step 2162, in step 2166, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5, but it may be lower than the winning probability in step 2164). The look-ahead effect lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2176.

On the other hand, if No in step 2156, in step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored in the RAM area) is the “fixed effect stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that is a big hit (for example, it is determined based on a winning / failing lottery random number). In the case of Yes in step 2170, in step 2172, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pre-reading effect lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2170, in step 2174, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/6, but it may be lower than the winning probability in step 2172). The look-ahead effect lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2176.

Next, in step 2176, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the pre-reading effect lottery (lottery of any of step 2164, step 2166, step 2172, and step 2174) has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2176, in step 2178, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the number of holds temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the hold (trigger hold) won in the lottery is exhausted. The number of fluctuation stop times Ha (0 to 4 times) of the main game symbol up to this point is derived. Next, in step 2180, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and derives the fluctuation stop count Hb of the main game symbol until the current stay stage ends based on the counter value. ..

Here, the fluctuation stop count Hb also includes the fluctuation stop count of the symbol currently being displayed for fluctuation. Further, as will be described later, whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed is determined at the start of the change. Therefore, when the symbol is changing, the look-ahead effect can be executed from the next change in which the changing symbol stops. be.

Next, in step 2182, in the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the number of times to execute the look-ahead effect (Ha in this example) is the minimum number of times to execute the look-ahead effect (the minimum number of times to execute an effective look-ahead effect, for example. (2 times) or more is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2182, in step 2184, in the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the derived Ha and Hb satisfy the relationship of Ha ≦ Hb (the look-ahead effect ends during the current stay stage). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2184, in step 2186, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets Ha in the look-ahead staging execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2142). Even if No in any of step 2152, step 2154, step 2160, step 2168, step 2176, step 2182, and step 2184, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2142).

In this way, by configuring so that the look-ahead effect is not executed when the look-ahead effect over a plurality of fluctuations does not end during the current stay stage (particularly, step 2184), the table switching and the look-ahead effect are executed at the same time. It will not be done, and it will be possible to avoid a situation that confuses the player. In the present embodiment, after the pre-reading effect lottery is executed, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed according to the determination of whether to straddle the stay stage, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the process related to the pre-reading effect is performed. The order may be changed as appropriate, and for example, the look-ahead staging lottery may be executed after it is determined that the stay stage is crossed (that is, if it is planned to cross the stay stage, the order may be changed as appropriate. In the first place, it means that it includes a configuration that does not execute the look-ahead staging lottery itself).

It should be noted that the look-ahead effect in this example is an effect that also occurs in the fluctuation related to the trigger hold, that is, the plurality of changes in the look-ahead effect over a plurality of changes may include the change related to the trigger hold. For example, an effect of the same aspect or an effect of the same system may occur from a change before the change related to the trigger hold to a change related to the trigger hold.

It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the look-ahead effect can be executed even when the end of the look-ahead effect over a plurality of fluctuations is after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage. When the look-ahead effect over multiple fluctuations straddles the end (or switching) of the stay stage, the expectation level that becomes a big hit in any of the fluctuations related to the look-ahead effect does not straddle the end (or switching) of the stay stage. It may be configured to be relatively higher than when the production is performed. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to attract the attention of the player in terms of whether or not the look-ahead effect occurs across the end (or switching) of the stay stage (and the effect), and the interest of the game. It will be possible to enhance the sex.

Further, if the look-ahead effect can be executed even when the look-ahead effect over a plurality of fluctuations is after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage, the look-ahead effect is until the final change at the end of the current stay stage. It may be configured to end (interrupt) with. Further, when the look-ahead effect is interrupted, a look-ahead effect different from the interrupted look-ahead effect (for example, a look-ahead effect or other effect corresponding to the effect on the stay stage after switching) can be executed instead. You may.

Further, in a certain stay stage, a high expectation effect or a look-ahead effect for notifying that a variation mode having a long fluctuation time is selected in the subsequent fluctuation is generated, and the high expectation effect or the high expectation effect is generated in the certain stay stage. If the variation mode with a long fluctuation time is not selected, the high expectation effect or the variation mode with a long variation time may be selected at the next stay stage. Further, in such a configuration, it is desirable that the pre-reading effect in the next stay stage is an effect suitable for the next stay stage.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, doublet such as "7, 7, 7". , If it is a lost symbol, the number of doublets such as “1 ・ 3 ・ 5”} and the variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the effect content determination process described later. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). Even if No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. 23. First, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is off. If Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the longest open hold effect permission flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2256, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect content determination table SM25ta {especially the normal time table (the effect permission flag off for holding at the longest opening}) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. }, The effect content is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2208).

On the other hand, if No in step 2254, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the effect permission flag for holding at the longest opening. Next, in step 2260, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the effect execution flag for holding at the longest opening. Next, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta {particularly, the normal time table (the effect permission flag on for holding at the longest opening}} based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. The content of the effect is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2208).

Here, FIG. 25 is an example of the effect content determination table SM25ta. In particular, the normal time effect content determination table is a table referred to when determining the effect in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time shortened game state, and as shown in the figure, is based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. , It is configured so that one production content is determined from a plurality of production content candidates. Further, when the effect permission flag for holding the longest opening is turned on, the same effect as the effect during the stay in the "long effect stage" is determined (the effect permission flag for holding the longest opening is set). When it is "off", the player can easily recognize that the effect related to the hold that occurred at the longest opening is because the effect during the stay in the "long effect stage" does not occur during the non-time reduction game. can). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the effect content, the variation mode, the table configuration, etc. It may be configured to determine the content (it may be configured so that different effects can be executed when the variation modes on the main game side are the same).

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, on the other hand, when No in step 2252, that is, when the current gaming state is the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, in step 2264, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the counter. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than 0 (a situation in which the look-ahead effect is executed). In the case of Yes in step 2264, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decrements the value of the look-ahead staging execution counter SM26c by 1. Next, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the currently set stay stage is the “long staging stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2268, in step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the look-ahead effect (for example, "in XX more times ...!" At the start of the fluctuation, and the look-ahead effect execution counter SM26c. A command for displaying the effect of counting down the value) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2274.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2268, in other words, when the look-ahead effect is executed in the "fixed effect stage", in step 2272, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in the stage of hitting or failing when the "fixed effect stage" changes. The content of the effect in is determined to be a look-ahead effect dedicated to the stage (for example, an effect in which the background display color changes based on the jackpot expectation level, etc.), and the process proceeds to step 2274. Even if No in step 2264, the process proceeds to step 2274.

Next, in step 2274, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the staging content determination table SM25ta (particularly, a table for a specific game) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol and the stay stage currently set. The content of the effect is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2208).

Here, the specific game-time effect content determination table of FIG. 25 is a table referred to when determining the effect in the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state (in this example, 80 STs), and is illustrated. It is configured so that the effect content is switched according to the set stay stage (number of changes during ST) (the effect content is also switched in response to the change mode / variation time of the main game symbol). It is configured as). To explain by giving an example of the effect content, the fixed time effect, which is the effect selected for the "fixed effect stage", first starts to change the decorative symbol and then the symbol, as shown in the image diagram at the bottom of the figure. When the image related to the fluctuation is displayed for 1 second, the effect at the hit / miss stage is displayed for 1 second. Here, the effect at the hit / fail stage is an image that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB when the look-ahead effect is not executed, and after the effect is displayed, the sub input button SB is operated or another 1 second. As the time passes, the display shifts to the effect display at the success / failure notification stage. On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the effect of changing the display color of the background image determined in the process of step 2268 (that is, the effect of prompting the operation of the sub-input button SB does not occur) in the effect in the hit / miss stage. ), And one second later after the effect display, the process shifts to the effect display at the pass / fail notification stage. Next, in the success / failure notification stage, an effect of notifying the player whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss is executed. If the look-ahead effect continues, the execution state of the look-ahead effect (in this example, the background display color) may be inherited until the end of the look-ahead effect. When the fixed time has passed), an image notifying the result of the change is displayed. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the effect content, the variation mode, the table configuration, etc. It may be configured to determine the content (it may be configured so that different effects can be executed when the variation modes on the main game side are the same). Further, although not particularly shown in this example, a dedicated effect (for example, super battle reach, special battle reach, etc.) is executed at any of the stay stages during the specific game even during the hold digestion on the first main game side. It may be configured to obtain. In addition, the effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB may be configured not to be executed in a situation where it is difficult to secure the effect execution scale (for example, when staying in the "short effect stage" in this example). Suitable.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag. Next, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 2309, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the map variation time management timer SM21t, and shifts to step 2310. Even if No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

Next, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2311, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a variable display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). , Step 2330.

On the other hand, if No in step 2312, in step 2316, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2316, in step 2318, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub-sub control unit SS side. Is sent to), and the process proceeds to step 2330.

On the other hand, if No in step 2316, has the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reached the display timing of the preview image or the reach image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S in step 2320? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an image display command related to the preview image and the reach image (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub-sub control unit SS side is set. (Sent), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Even if No in step 2320, the process proceeds to step 2330.

Next, in step 2330, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2331, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2900. Will be). Next, in step 2332, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2334, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol changing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2400). Even if No in step 2310 or step 2330, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the jackpot is the first hit (the jackpot in the non-probability variation / non-time reduction gaming state). If Yes in step 2406, the process proceeds to step 2410. On the other hand, if No in step 2406 (when it is the first hit), in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the longest open hold effect execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, when N = first hit, in step 2409, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the effect execution flag for holding at the longest opening, and proceeds to step 2410.

Next, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to (increments) the value of the consecutive villa count counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 2412. Even if No in step 2408, the process proceeds to step 2412.

Next, in step 2412 and step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special gaming flag and displays the jackpot start display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of jackpot). , Step 2416. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2416.

Next, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (game playability and big hit). It may be executed as needed based on the type etc.). Next, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current jackpot is the maximum round jackpot (for example, 16R jackpot and the jackpot related to the 7A / 7B symbol). judge. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the ending effect {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive villas during the specific game, the total number of balls obtained during the consecutive villas, and the specification of a plurality of types. Set the command related to the display of the special game or the specific game, which is displayed only when one or a plurality of combinations such as the occurrence of all the effects are satisfied), and the process proceeds to step 2426. On the other hand, if No in either step 2418 or step 2420, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the jackpot progress display, and proceeds to step 2426.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the effect displayed during the big hit execution a special effect based on the number of consecutive villas of the big hit (the first hit is not counted), and the second main game start port. If a big hit occurs due to a hold caused by entering the ball during the longest opening of the electric accessory B11d, even if the big hit is the first hit, it is counted as the number of consecutive villas. It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of the change related to the hold that occurred during the longest opening of the object B11d. Note that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to this. For example, when a plurality of conditions exist as conditions for generating an ending effect, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit in a specific effect). , Etc.) may be considered to be satisfied.

Next, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the jackpot end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2430, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the special gaming flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2900). Even if No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Action)
Next, the operation in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28. First, the figure is an action diagram showing a look-ahead effect during a specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, the case where the specific game is completed without winning the big hit is illustrated.

First, in a situation where the game is in a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state, the reserved balls on the first main game side are digested, and after the number of reserved balls on the second main game side becomes four, at the timing of 1 in the figure. , The change of the second main game symbol will start. Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the short staging stage ends and the stage shifts to the long staging stage when the main game symbol fluctuates 30 times after the special game.

Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed because the trigger hold that can trigger the execution of the look-ahead effect occurs. At this timing, the fluctuation stop count Ha until the trigger hold digestion is 3 times, and the fluctuation stop count Hb until the end of the long staging stage is 40 times (Ha ≦ Hb), so the look-ahead staging is executed. Will be done. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, since the first change of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined, the look-ahead effect is executed from the change.

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol related to the digestion of the trigger hold is started. The fluctuation related to the trigger hold is a loss, and the fluctuation related to the trigger hold in the long staging stage has a fluctuation time of 10 seconds or more, so that the fluctuation time is 60 seconds. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the look-ahead effect ends when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends.

Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed because the trigger hold that can trigger the execution of the look-ahead effect occurs. At this timing, the fluctuation stop count Ha until the trigger hold digestion is 3 times, and the fluctuation stop count Hb until the end of the long staging stage is 1 (Ha> Hb), so the look-ahead staging is executed. Will not be done. Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the main game symbol fluctuates 70 times after the special game, the long staging stage ends and the stage shifts to the fixed staging stage.

Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed because the trigger hold that can trigger the execution of the look-ahead effect occurs. At this timing, the fluctuation stop count Ha until the trigger hold digestion is 2 times, and the fluctuation stop count Hb until the fixed effect stage ends is 10 times (Ha ≦ Hb), so the look-ahead effect is executed. Will be done. Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, since the first change of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined, the look-ahead effect is executed from the change. Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, the look-ahead effect ends when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends. Since the look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect in the fixed effect stage, the fluctuation time related to the trigger hold is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing of 12 in the figure, the fixed effect stage ends and the specific game also ends when the main game symbol fluctuates 80 times after the special game.

Next, the operation in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 29. First, the figure is an action diagram showing the variation mode of the main game symbol during the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, the case where the long staging stage is completed without winning the big hit is illustrated.

First, under the situation of the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state, the change of the first main game symbol, which is the first change in the specific game, is started at the timing 1 in the figure. As shown in the lower part of the figure, at the time of loss, the limited frequency table 1 on the first main game side and the limited frequency table 1 on the second main game side have the same table contents and do not depend on the number of reservations. .. In this case (table contents surrounded by a dotted line in the limited frequency table 1), let X be. The table content to be referred to when this timing changes is X. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side is changed from two to one.

Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the second variation in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to when this timing changes is X. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side is reduced from 1 to 0. At the start of the change of the first main game symbol related to this timing, there is one hold on the first main game side, and at the start of the change of the first main game symbol related to the timing 1 in the figure, the hold of the first main game side is Although it is one, the table content to be referred to is X regardless of the number of reservations.

Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol, which is the third change in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to when this timing changes is X. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is reduced from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol, which is the fifth change in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to when this timing changes is X. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is changed from 3 to 2. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to this timing, the hold of the second main game side is three, and at the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to the timing of 3 in the figure, the hold of the second main game side is Although it is one, the table content to be referred to is X regardless of the number of reservations.

As described above, in this example, when the variation mode is determined, regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side during the short staging stage, and regardless of the number of reservations. The contents of the referenced tables are the same.

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the short effect stage ends and the stage is switched to the long effect stage because the change of the main game symbol, which is the 30th variation in the specific game, is completed. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the 31st variation in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to when this timing changes is Z. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is changed from two to one. Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the 32nd variation in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to when this timing changes is Y. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is reduced from 1 to 0. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to this timing, the hold of the second main game side is one, and at the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to the timing of 6 in the figure, the hold of the second main game side is Since there are two, the contents of the table to be referred to differ depending on the number of holds (Y and Z).

Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the 33rd variation in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to when this timing changes is Z. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is changed from two to one. Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the 34th variation in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to when this timing changes is Y. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side is reduced from 1 to 0. At the start of the change of the first main game symbol related to this timing, the hold of the first main game side is one, and at the start of the change of the first main game symbol related to the timing of 8 in the figure, the hold of the first main game side is Since there are two, the contents of the table to be referred to differ depending on the number of holds (Y and Z).

As described above, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode are the same regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side during the long staging stage. However, when the number of reservations is different, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode may be different.

The table contents at the time of determining the variation mode of the main game symbol during the specific game are not limited to this, and the operation of one example is shown with reference to FIG. 30. First, the figure is an action diagram showing the variation mode of the main game symbol during the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, the case where the long staging stage is completed without winning the big hit is illustrated.

First, at the timing 1 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol, which is the second change in the specific game, is started. Further, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the variation mode of the second main game symbol has different table contents depending on whether or not the first main game side is on hold at the time of loss. The case where there is a hold on the first main game side is defined as X'. The case where there is no hold on the first main game side is defined as Y'. The table content to be referred to when this timing changes is X'because there is a hold on the first main game side. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is changed from two to one. Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the change of the first main game symbol, which is the fourth change in the specific game, is started. Due to this fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side is reduced from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol, which is the fifth change in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to when this timing changes is Y'because there is no hold on the first main game side. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is changed from two to one.

As described above, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when the variation mode of the second main game side is determined during the short staging stage are configured to differ depending on whether or not the first main game side is on hold.

Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the short effect stage ends and the stage is switched to the long effect stage because the change of the main game symbol, which is the 30th variation in the specific game, is completed. Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the 32nd variation in the specific game, is started, and at the timing of 6 in the figure, the second main game, which is the 35th variation in the specific game. The fluctuation of the symbol starts. At the time when the change of the second main game symbol starts at the timing of 5 in the figure, there is one hold on the side of the first main game, whereas the change of the second main game symbol starts at the timing of 6 in the figure. At times, the number of reservations on the first main game side is 0, but the table contents referred to when determining the variation mode of the second main game symbol are the same, and the variation time is 10 seconds for both. ing.

With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol is predetermined in the game in the probability-variable game state (and the time-shortened game state) with a limited number of times. It is configured so that the candidates of the selected variation mode (variation time) are different (switched) when the number of times is reached. In addition, by switching the effect content according to the change of the variation mode, if the mode of the effect is different according to the progress of the game in the specific game {probability variable game state with limited number of times (and time reduction game state)}. It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

(Example 1 of change from this embodiment)
Further, although not particularly shown in this example, if there is a hold that becomes a big hit (particularly, a hold on the second main game side) at the end of the special game, the big hit hold is made by executing a special effect. It is possible to produce a big hit related to the above in a novel way. Therefore, such a configuration will be referred to as change example 1 from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 6 in the first modification from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are from step 1636 (variant 1) to step 1800 (variant 1), the purpose of which is to execute a termination demo. That is, when the final round of the special game is completed, in step 1636 (variant 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the end demo execution permission flag and shifts to step 1638 (variant 1). Next, in step 1638 (variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1638 (variation 1), in step 1800 (variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the end demo time control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process in step 1997). .. Even if No in step 1638 (variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (variation 1) of FIG. 31 in the modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo executing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a long demo time jackpot symbol (7A / 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the end demo time timer (the timer on the main side for measuring the end demo time of the special game) for a long time (for example, 10 seconds). Set and start, and proceed to step 1810. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1804, in other words, when the stop symbol is a short demo time jackpot symbol (3A, 3B, 5A, 5B), in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the end demo time timer. A short time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub side and a command related to the determined end demo time information (step 1999 control command transmission process, sub-main control unit SM. Will be sent to the side). Next, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the end demo executing flag and proceeds to step 1814. Even if No in step 1802, the process proceeds to step 1814.

Next, in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value is 0. If Yes in step 1814, in step 1816 the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the end demo running flag. Next, in step 1818, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the end demo execution permission flag. Next, in step 1820, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1650, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game described above, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1814, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 19 in the first modification from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are from step 2480 (variant 1) to step 2600 (variant 1), the purpose of which is to execute the end demo effect and the end demo extension effect. That is, after turning off the special game, in step 2480 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the end demo time is long (10 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 2480 (variant 1), in step 2482 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts by setting a long time (for example, 10 seconds) in the demo time display timer, and steps 2486 (variable 1). Move to strange 1). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2480 (variation 1), in step 2484 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts by setting a short time (for example, 3 seconds) in the demo time display timer, and steps. It shifts to 2486 (variant 1).

Next, in step 2486 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display an end demo image (for example, an image notifying the number of acquired game balls, the number of consecutive villas, etc.) (in step 2900). Display command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the transmission control process). Next, in step 2488 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the flag during the end demo display, and proceeds to step 2490 (variant 1). Even if No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process proceeds to step 2490 (variation 1).

By making the changes as described above, in the change example 1 from the present embodiment, the end demo effect for notifying the result of the special game and the like can be executed at the end of the special game, and after the end of the demo effect. (After the end of the special game), a predetermined period after the start of the change of the main game symbol (specific game) (if there is a big hit hold, until just before the end of the big hit change, if there is no big hit hold, it is related to the hold that exists at the present time. By displaying an effect that is almost the same as the demo effect (for example, an image that informs the result of the special game is continuously displayed even during the change of the main game symbol) until the end of the change), at the end of the special game. If there is a hold that is a big hit in the hold, the image that is almost the same as the demo effect is displayed until just before the symbol stop (= big hit) related to the big hit hold, so for the player. , After the end of the special game, suddenly it becomes the next big hit without going through the fluctuation during the specific game, and it becomes a novel production such as recognizing that the special game has started again, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. It will be possible. In addition, by making the execution time of the end demo effect different depending on the main game symbol that won the big hit, the player can perform the end demo effect and the effect during the change of the main game symbol that executes the same effect as the end demo effect. It is indistinguishable, and the fun of the game will increase.

Next, in step 2490 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the end demo display displaying flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2490 (variation 1), in step 2492 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a demo time display timer (timer on the sub side for measuring the end demo time of the special game) value. It is determined whether or not it is 0. In the case of Yes in step 2492 (variant 1), in step 2600 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the end demo extension effect execution process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2900). do. In addition, even if No in step 2490 (variant 1) or step 2492 (variant 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900).

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, after the end of the special game, the game always shifts to the probability-variable game state with a limited number of times, and the effect of the period of the probability-variable game state is gradually switched to enhance the interest of the game. Configured to improve. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the player's expectation cannot be fueled in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state depending on the jackpot symbol. Therefore, the configuration for solving such a problem is defined as the second embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a specific region C22 in which a gaming ball can enter inside the second major winning opening C20. Further, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a configuration in which a gaming ball enters a specific area C22 during the execution of a special game, so that the gaming machine shifts to a probability-variable gaming center state after the completion of the special game (so-called ball accuracy). Machine).

First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. First, the differences from the present embodiment are step 1408 (second), step 14012-1 (second) and step 1412-2 (second), the purpose of which is a non-probability variable gaming state and time reduction. The variation mode in the gaming state is different from that shown in the present embodiment. That is, after the stop symbol of the main game symbol is determined in step 1410-2, in step 1408 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1408 (second), in step 1412-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode of the main game symbol based on the random number on the main game side and the result of the winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, if No in step 1408 (second), the process proceeds to step 1411, and the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1411, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 0, in step 1412-2 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M is based on the main game side random number / winning / failing lottery result. Determine the variation mode of the symbol. On the other hand, if No in step 1411, the same processing as in this embodiment is executed in the processing of steps 1450 and 1413.

Here, FIG. 35 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the combination of the main game symbols that are big hits is different, and that a table to be referred to in the non-probability variable game state and the time shortening game state is provided. Of the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbol that makes it easy for the game ball to enter a specific area is "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, 7B", which is specified. The main game symbol on which a special game that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the area is executed is "2A".

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 6 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1611 (second) and step 1850 (second), the purpose of which is a distribution game (a unit game in which the second large winning opening C20 having a specific area is opened). ) Is to be configured to be able to be executed. That is, after setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608, or when the special game execution flag is on, in step 1611 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently It is determined whether or not the round to be executed is the distribution game execution round (second R, 4R in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (second), the process proceeds to step 1612, and the same processing as in the present embodiment is executed.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 36 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game executing flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process proceeds to step 1866. On the other hand, if No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a long open symbol for the stopped main game symbol (the second big winning opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a big hit symbol that opens for a time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds) as an opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. , An open pattern designed so that the ball entering the specific area C22 is deterministic), and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in other words, when the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a short open pattern as an open pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. -N (for example, an opening pattern designed to be open for 0.1 seconds and non-entry into the specific region C22 is deterministic) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the second embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is "5A / 7A", the ratio selected at the time of a big hit is "524/1024", and the second main game The long open symbol on the side is "3B, 5B, 7B", and the ratio selected at the time of big hit is "1024/1024", so the second main game side is more than the big hit on the first main game side. The big hit is configured so that the second big winning opening C20 is opened for a long time in the distribution game execution round, that is, the game ball can easily enter the specific area C22 at the time of the big hit.

Next, in step 1860, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have won in the second large winning opening C20. .. If Yes in step 1866, the process proceeds to step 1870. On the other hand, if No in step 1866, in step 1868, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game executing flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes in step 1874, in step 1876, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag and proceeds to step 1878. Even if No in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1634). Even if No in step 1868, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 36 in the second embodiment. First, the differences from the present embodiment are about step 1680 (second), step 1682 (second), step 1684 (second) and step 1686 (second), the purpose of which is the second embodiment. In the distribution game executed in, the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state is different depending on whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22. That is, at the time of executing this subroutine, in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1680 (second), in step 1682 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1652 and step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation number counter MP51c, and turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c and proceeds to step 1658, and thereafter, in steps 1658 and 1660. , The same process as this embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680 (second), in step 1686 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M tells the time reduction counter MP52c a predetermined number of times B (in this example, 50 times. Is not limited. A value of A or less is preferable for a predetermined number of times), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

Here, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22 during the special game, the game is configured to shift to the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game. Further, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time-shortened game state after the special game is the same as the number of fluctuations in the probability-variable game state A. (80 times in this example), and if the game ball does not enter the specific area during the special game, the number of fluctuations in which the time is shortened after the special game is different from the predetermined number of times A (small). ) The predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example). Further, as for the variation mode of the main game symbol in the time-reduced game state, the three-stage limited frequency table (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3) is used in the time-reduced game state of the predetermined number of times A. It is configured to refer to the main game table 3-2 in the time-reduced game state of the predetermined number of times B, and to refer to a table having a different effect content. It should be noted that the configuration is applied regardless of whether the jackpot symbols that triggered the execution of the special game are the same or different (for example, even if the special game is triggered by the same jackpot symbol, the special game is executed. The number of time reductions differs depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22, etc.). Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the time-saving game may be configured to be determined based on the symbol at the time of a big hit (for example, during a special game). If the ball is not entered into the specific area C22, the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the time-shortening game is determined by the jackpot symbol, etc.).

Next, FIG. 39 is an example of the effect content determination table in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that it has an effect content determination table referred to in the non-probability variable gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, which is shown in the lower right part of the figure. In the second embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the game state after the special game does not become the probability fluctuation game state, but the non-probability fluctuation / time reduction game state (50 fluctuations). ). In that case, the content of the production will be decided by referring to the table. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the number of fluctuations, the content of the effect, the mode of variation, the configuration of the table, and the like.

As described above, depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the special game is executed (specific area). In a gaming machine (so-called ball-probability type gaming machine) that shifts to the probability-variable gaming state with a ball entering and does not shift to the probability-variable gaming state without entering a ball, the non-probability-variable gaming state is not reached. By making the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state different from the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation gaming state, an appropriate effect is executed according to the profit aspect of the player. You can do it. Although not shown in this example, when the distribution game is executed, a special effect (an effect that encourages whether or not the second large winning opening C20 is open for a long time, entry into a specific area C22) is performed. It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not the ball is made, an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, etc.) {The execution mode is not particularly limited, but for example. In the case of an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, the effect display device SG or the effect display device SG can be used at the timing (preferably immediately after) the ball has been entered. It can be exemplified that the staging device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable body accessory for staging, a light guide plate, etc.) is configured to execute the notification (for example, on the staging display device SG). An image drawn as "V" is displayed, a movable object for staging is displaced from an initial position to a position where staging is possible, or an image is displayed on the light guide plate by irradiating the light guide plate with light. Make it emerge, etc.)}.

Further, in the second embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big winning opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly shown, a first unit game that can be opened for the first time (preferably less than or less than one firing interval of the game ball), and a predetermined time after opening for the first time. It has a second unit game, which can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time, after the time is closed. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, the probability is even after the opening operation of the first time, which has a low expectation for the probability fluctuation transition, is completed. It is possible to have the possibility that the opening operation of the second time, which has a high expectation for the fluctuation transition, is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time is equal to or longer than one firing interval of the game ball or more than one firing interval in order to secure the ball entering the specific area, and (half of the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game). It is more preferable that the ball is at least one shot interval) or more, and it is particularly preferable that it is at least (the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (one shot interval of the game ball) or more.

As described above, depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the special game is executed (specific area). In a gaming machine (so-called ball-probability type gaming machine) that shifts to the probability-variable gaming state with a ball entering and does not shift to the probability-variable gaming state without entering a ball, the non-probability-variable gaming state is not reached. By making the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state different from the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation gaming state, an appropriate effect is executed according to the profit aspect of the player. You can do it. Although not shown in this example, when the distribution game is executed, a special effect (an effect that encourages whether or not the second large winning opening C20 is open for a long time, entry into a specific area C22) is performed. It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not the ball is made, an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, etc.) {The execution mode is not particularly limited, but for example. In the case of an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, the effect display device SG or the effect display device SG can be used at the timing (preferably immediately after) the ball has been entered. It can be exemplified that the staging device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable body accessory for staging, a light guide plate, etc.) is configured to execute the notification (for example, on the staging display device SG). An image drawn as "V" is displayed, a movable object for staging is displaced from an initial position to a position where staging is possible, or an image is displayed on the light guide plate by irradiating the light guide plate with light. Make it emerge, etc.)}.

Further, in the second embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big winning opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly shown, a first unit game that can be opened for the first time (preferably less than or less than one firing interval of the game ball), and a predetermined time after opening for the first time. It has a second unit game, which can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time, after the time is closed. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, the probability is even after the opening operation of the first time, which has a low expectation for the probability fluctuation transition, is completed. It is possible to have the possibility that the opening operation of the second time, which has a high expectation for the fluctuation transition, is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time is equal to or longer than one firing interval of the game ball or more than one firing interval in order to secure the ball entering the specific area, and (half of the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game). It is more preferable that the ball is at least one shot interval) or more, and it is particularly preferable that it is at least (the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (one shot interval of the game ball) or more.

In a gaming machine (so-called ball-certaining machine) that can shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game as in the second embodiment, ( 1) Only one large winning opening is provided, and a normal round (a round in which entry into the specific area C22 is invalid) and a distribution game execution round (entry into the specific area C22) are provided at the one large winning opening. (2) A large winning opening A and a large winning opening B having a specific area C22 are provided, and a normal round is executed at the large winning opening A, and the large winning opening B is executed. (3) The large winning opening A and the large winning opening B having the specific area C22 are arranged so as to overlap each other (the large winning opening B is on the top). It is possible to execute a normal round at the large winning opening A, execute a distribution game execution round at the large winning opening B, and enter the specific area C22 only during the execution of the distribution game execution round. , (4) The large winning opening A and the large winning opening B having the specific area C22 are arranged so as to overlap each other (the large winning opening B is on the top), and the normal round is provided at the large winning opening A. Is executed, the distribution game execution round is executed at the large winning opening B, and the game ball can enter the specific area C22 only during the execution of the distribution game execution round (a shielding member is provided, and the shielding member is provided. When the member is in the open state, it becomes easy to enter the specific area C22, and when the shielding member is in the closed state, it becomes difficult to enter the specific area C22).

(Example 1 of change from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, a configuration of a gaming machine that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game is exemplified. Such a configuration is the first. 2 The configuration is not limited to the embodiment. Therefore, a configuration having a specific region C22 different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as change example 1 from the second embodiment, and the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 40 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the first modification from the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings is shown, that is, the number of prize balls in the first main game starting port A10 is three, and the number of winning balls is three, and the second main game starting opening B10. The number of prize balls is 1, the number of prize balls in the first prize opening C10 is 15, the number of prize balls in the second prize opening C20 is 13, and the number of prize balls in the general prize opening is 13. There are 10 balls. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the number of prize balls in the second prize opening C20 is smaller than the number of prize balls in the first prize opening C10.

Next, FIG. 41 shows the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 11 in the first modification from the second embodiment. It is a flowchart. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 1450 (second variation 1), step 1431-1 (second variation 1) and step 1431-2 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1411. When the limited frequency counter value is not 0, in step 1450 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1413.

Further, after turning on the condition device operation flag in step 1440, in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol with a limit frequency jackpot symbol (time reduction after the jackpot ends). It is a jackpot symbol that becomes a limited frequency state after the game state ends, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1431-1 (second change 1), in step 1431-2 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter to a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Set and move to step 1500.

Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 1) of FIG. 13 in the modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the first stage range (100 ≧ G> 21). In the case of Yes in step 1451-1, in step 1451-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 3 and is based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result. The fluctuation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413). On the other hand, step 1
If No in 451-1, in step 1451-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is within the second stage range (G = 21). When the limited frequency counter value is 21, it is the final fluctuation in the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-3, in step 1451-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is the probability-variable gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-4, in step 1451-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1, and based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result, the variation mode related to the main game symbol. (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413). If No in step 1451-4, the process proceeds to step 1451-2, and the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined with reference to the main game table 3. As described above, in the change example 1 from the second embodiment, when the variation mode is determined between the case of the probability variation gaming state and the case of the non-probability variation gaming state in the final variation of the time shortening gaming state. In other words, the table referred to in the above is different, in other words, after the jackpot is completed, the game ball enters the specific area C22 and the ball does not enter during the execution of the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B". The table to be referred to when determining the variation mode in the final symbol variation in the time-reduced gaming state is configured to be different. If No in step 1451-3, in step 1451-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M relates to the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result with reference to the limited frequency table 2 and relates to the main game symbol. The variation mode (variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1413). In the first modification from the second embodiment, when the jackpot related to the above-mentioned limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, 100 times are set in the limited frequency counter, and the time reduction counter MP52c is set. Is set to 80 times. Because of this configuration, when the limited frequency counter value is not within the first stage range, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 20 or less, the non-time shortened gaming state and the limited frequency counter value are 0. It will be a bigger situation. In such a state, by configuring to determine the variation mode of the main game symbol by referring to the limited frequency table, when the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, the "design" is completed. The transition is made in the order of "time reduction game state for 80 fluctuations → limited frequency state for 20 symbol fluctuations (non-time reduction game state)". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and in the time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency state A (the limited frequency table to be referred to is "limited frequency table A1 → limited frequency table A2 → limited" in the period of 80 symbol fluctuations. (Transition to frequency table A3)), and after the time-reduced gaming state ends and the non-time-reduced gaming state shifts to the non-time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency state B (the limited frequency table to be referred to is the limited frequency) during the period of 20 symbol fluctuations. Only the table B1 ”), that is, the limited frequency state may be configured so as not to straddle different gaming states. If the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, 80 times are set in the time reduction counter MP52c regardless of whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to the "7B". Then, 100 times are set in the limited frequency counter, that is, it is configured to shift to the limited frequency state after the end of the time-reduced gaming state. If a big hit is made when the limited frequency counter value is not 0, it may be regarded as a big hit in the consecutive villas, and the above-mentioned consecutive villas count counter value may be added (time reduction game state). Even if it is finished, if you win the jackpot in a limited frequency state, you can consider it as a jackpot of the consecutive villas). Not limited to this, when the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won and the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to the "7B", the time reduction counter MP52c is displayed. 80 times are set and 100 times are set in the limited frequency counter, while 50 times are set in the time saving number counter MP52c and 70 times are set in the limited frequency counter when the ball is not entered in the specific area C22. It may be configured as follows. In addition, in the case where the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won and the ball is not entered in the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B", the time is shortened after the special game is completed. In the final variation, the variation mode of the main game symbol may be determined with reference to the limited frequency table (for example, the limited frequency table 3) referred to only by the final variation. The content of the limited frequency table 3 does not depend on the number of holdings, and may be configured so that a uniform fluctuation time of 7 seconds is determined in both cases of hit and loss. In addition, in the case where the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won and the ball is not entered in the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B", the time is shortened after the special game is completed. The limited frequency to be referred to in the final variation is the limited frequency to be referred to in the final variation in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game when the ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B". The tables may be configured to be the same, and in such a configuration, the effect content and the effect tendency in the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state may be the same.

Here, FIG. 43 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are that the combination of the main game symbols that are big hits is different, and that a limited frequency table is provided. Of the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbol that makes it easy for the game ball to enter a specific area is "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, 7B", which is specified. The main game symbol on which a special game that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the area is executed is "4A". Further, when the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, the game shifts to the time-reduced gaming state of 80 symbol fluctuations (the fluctuation time is determined with reference to the main game table 3). When the 80-time symbol variation is completed, the process shifts to the limited frequency state of the 20-time symbol variation (the variation time is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2). In the case of the limited frequency state with reference to the limited frequency table 2, the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is configured so that a long time exceeding 10 seconds is not selected regardless of the result of the winning / failing lottery. In addition, the final change in the game state (80th change after the end of the big hit) that shifts to the time when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" ends is specified during the execution of the "7B". When there is a ball entering the area C22, the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1, while when there is no ball entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the "7B", the main It is configured to determine the variation mode with reference to the game table 3 (the shortest variation time in the loss of the limited frequency table 1 is longer than the minimum variation time in the loss of the main game table 3). .. The limited frequency table 1 or the main game table 3 can be referred to in the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state, but the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state is the probability-variable gaming state and the non-probability-variable game. Even if the effect content in the final variation is different depending on the state, that is, the effect content in the final variation is different depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. good. For example, when the limited frequency table 1 in which the symbol changes for a relatively long time is referred to, it is possible to incite whether the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are terminated or a big hit is caused by the symbol fluctuation. You may perform the production.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 17 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 1611 (second variation 1), steps 1635-1 (second variation 1) and 1635-2 (second variation 1), i.e., sub in step 1608. After setting the special game start display instruction command to the side, or when the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610, in step 1611 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently executed. It is determined whether or not the round to be executed is a distribution game execution round (a round in which the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, the second R and the fourth R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1850 (second), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1612.

Further, in the case of the final round in the special game in step 1634, in step 1635-1 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the end demo execution permission flag (when turned on, the special game end demo). Turn on the flag that will start the time) and move to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Next, step 1635-2 (second variation 1)
Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1800 (variation 1), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (variation 1) of FIG. 32 (variation 1) in the modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is step 1803 (second change 1), that is, if the end demo running flag was off in step 1802, in step 1803 (second change 1). The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22 in the special game. In step 1803 (second variation 1), if Yes, the process proceeds to step 1806, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1808. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the special game end demo time, which is the period after the end of the final round of the special game, is such that the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. It is configured so that the time value differs depending on whether or not there is a sphere. The conditions under which the special game end demo time differs are not limited to this, and may be different depending on the game state at the time of a big hit, for example. Specifically, (1) it differs depending on whether it is a probability-variable gaming state or a non-probability-variable gaming state, and (2) it differs depending on whether it is a time-reduced gaming state or a non-time-reduced gaming state. 3) Probability variable game state and time shortened game state, probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state, non-probable variable game state and time shortened game state, non-probable variable game state and non-time shortened game state, (4) Probability-variable game state and time-reduced game state, probability-variable game state and non-time-reduced game state, non-probability-variable game state and time-reduced game state, and non-probability-variable game state and It may be configured to be different from the non-time reduction gaming state in some combinations.

Further, in this example, regarding the special game related to a certain jackpot symbol, (1) the special game when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state and the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. The game end demo time is the first period (10 seconds), (2) the special game end demo time when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the special game. Is the second period (3 seconds), (3) The special game end demo time is the second period (3) when the special game is won in the time shortened game state and the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. 1 second), (4) The special game end demo time is the third period (3 seconds) when the special game is won in the time shortened game state and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the special game. As such, it may be configured such that "second period <third period <first period". It should be noted that such a configuration is preferably applied to the special game won in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state or the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state. As a specific example of the effect executed during the special game end demo time, in the first period, the effect of notifying the transition to the probability fluctuation game state and forgetting to take out the IC card used for lending the game ball. In the third period, a non-probability variable game state and a time-saving game state will be announced, and the IC card will be forgotten to be removed. An effect related to alerting is executed, and in the second period, an effect of notifying that the probability fluctuation gaming state (consecutive villa state) continues is executed. In this way, the effect to be executed may be different depending on the length of the special game end demo time. Comparing the length of the special game end demo time for each situation, the special game end demo time when the non-probability variable game state is before the start of the special game and the probability variable game state is after the special game ends (first hit). Is 10 seconds, the demo time for the end of the special game is 3 seconds when the game is in a non-probability variable game state and the time is shortened after the end of the special game, and the demo time is 3 seconds before the start of the special game. In the case of a game state (continuation of consecutive villas), the special game end demo time may be configured to have a time value relationship such as 1 second.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 19 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2480 (second variation 1) to step 2484 (second variation 1). That is, after turning off the special game in step 2430, in step 2480 (second change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the special game end command as a long release command (end demo set in step 1810). It is a command related to time information, and it is determined whether or not the command is related to the fact that the end demo time is 10 seconds, which is a long time. In the case of Yes in step 2480 (second change 1), in step 2482 (second change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S notifies that the continuous villa continuation image (transition to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game). For example, set a command to display "Congratulations! Still more!" For a long time (10 seconds in this example), and move to the next process (process in step 2900). On the other hand, if No in step 2480 (second change 1), that is, if the special game end command is a short open command, in step 2484 (second change 1), the consecutive villa end image (probability after the end of the special game). It is an effect to notify that the game does not shift to the variable game state. For example, a command for displaying "See you again!" For a short time (3 seconds in this example) is set, and the next process (step 2900) is performed. Process). It should be noted that the special game end demo time is configured to be different depending on whether the special game end demo time is a long time (10 seconds) or a short time (3 seconds). Shortening the time after the end of the special game when the game end demo time is long (10 seconds) The production mode (effect tendency) in the game state and the special when the special game end demo time is short (3 seconds) Time reduction after the end of the game It is configured to be the same as the effect mode (effect tendency) in the game state.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the second embodiment, a special game end demo time is set after the final round in the special game is completed, and the game is specified by the special game being executed. By configuring so that the period of the special game end demo time differs depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the area C22, it is highly profitable for the player when the game ball enters the specific area C22. While performing an effect that congratulates the player of the time, if the ball is not entered in the specific area C22, it is not highly profitable for the player, so after performing a short period of effect, the game returns to the normal game. It can be a game machine with more intonation.

In the first modification from the second embodiment, a special game start demo time may be provided. In the special game start demo time, it is not determined whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the special game. Therefore, the special game start demo time depends on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22. The period of will not be different. However, the special game start demo time may be different depending on the game state when the special game is won. For example, when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state, 10 seconds (right to the player). (Relatively long time to execute the effect that encourages the player to hit), 3 seconds if the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state (relative because the effect that encourages the player to execute the right hit is not executed) It may be configured to be for a short time).

(Example 2 of change from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment and the first modification from the second embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine that shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game is configured. Although exemplified, such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the second embodiment and the configuration of the modification 1 from the second embodiment. Therefore, the configuration having the specific region C22 different from the second embodiment and the first modification from the second embodiment is referred to as the second modification from the second embodiment, and the changes from the second embodiment are described in detail below. Describe.

First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 6 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1609-1 (second variation 2) and step 3100 (second variation 2), that is, in step 1608, a special game start display instruction command to the sub side is issued. After setting, in step 1609-1 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demo execution permission flag and shifts to step 3100 (second change 2). On the other hand, even in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). Next, in step 3100 (second variation 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the start demo time control process described later, and proceeds to step 1610.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 36 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, the differences from the second embodiment are step 1851-1 (second variation 2), steps 1899-1 (second variation 2) to step 1899-7 (second variation 2), that is, step. In 1851-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is off during the distribution demo time. In the case of Yes in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1852, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1854. Further, after setting the long opening pattern in step 1856 or setting the short opening pattern in step 1858, in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol. It is determined whether or not it is the first main game symbol (first main game jackpot symbol). In the case of Yes in step 1899-1 (second change 2), in step 1899-2 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the distribution start demo timer for a long time {step 1899-3 (second change 2). It is a time value that is longer than the time value set in the change 2). In this example, 10 seconds} is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 1899-4 (second change 2). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in other words, when the stop symbol is the second main game symbol (second main game jackpot symbol), step 1899-3 (second variation 2). ), The CPUMC of the main control board M is a time value that is shorter than the time value set in the distribution start demo timer in a short time {step 1899-2 (second variation 2), and in this example, 3 Second} is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 1899-4 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-4 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a command related to the determined distribution start demo time information (a command to the sub side, and the distribution of the special game being executed. Set the command) related to the time value of the minute demo time. Next, in step 1899-5 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution demo time flag (the flag that starts the distribution demo time when it is turned on), and steps. Move to 1899-6 (2nd variation 2). Even if No in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1899-6 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the distribution start demo timer is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1899-6 (second change 2), in step 1899-7 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during the distribution demo time and proceeds to step 1860. .. If No in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634). As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the distribution start demo time, which is the start demo time of the distribution game execution round, is the second when the first main game side is a big hit. It takes longer than the case of a big hit on the main game side.

Next, FIG. 49 is a configuration diagram of an example of a large winning opening opening pattern. The jackpot symbols in the second embodiment are three types of the first main game jackpot symbol "4A, 5A, 7A" and three types of the second main game jackpot symbol "4B, 5B, 7B", for a total of six types of jackpots. It has a symbol, and there are only two types of open patterns in one round: "short open = 500 ms open → closed" and "long open = 30000 ms open → closed". The opening pattern of the large winning opening (first large winning opening C10 or second large winning opening C20) is not limited to this, and the number of types may be increased, such as opening multiple times in one round. An open pattern (for example, "10000 ms open-> 10000 ms closed-> 10000 ms open->closed") may be used. Here, in the second embodiment of the change from the second embodiment, only the second main game chief opening jackpot "5B / 7B" has a long opening pattern of the big winning opening in all rounds (16R). .. In addition, the distribution game execution round in which the second big winning opening C20 is opened is the fourth round, and the first big winning opening is opened in the other rounds. Further, in all the big hits, the number of rounds to be executed is 4 or more, and the distribution game execution round is configured to be executed without fail. In this way, the first main game chief open jackpot "5A / 7A" has a round with a short opening (2nd R), while the second main game chief open jackpot "5B / 7B" has a round. There is no round that becomes a short opening, that is, the number of rounds that become a short opening is configured so that the number of rounds that become a short opening is larger than that of the second main game chief opening jackpot.

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the start demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 (second variation 2) of FIG. 47 in the second embodiment of the modification. First, in step 3102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the start demo executing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts by setting the start demo time (3 seconds in this example) in the start demo time timer. Next, in step 3016, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped jackpot symbol is the second main game jackpot symbol (3B, 5B, and 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the second long open command (the special game related to the second main game jackpot symbol) as the special game start display instruction command to the sub side. The command related to the above is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, if No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped jackpot symbol is the first main game length open jackpot symbol (5A and 7A in this example). do. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the first long open command (the second big winning opening of the first main game jackpot symbol) as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. A command relating to the start of a special game in which C20 is open for a long time) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3110, in other words, when the stopped jackpot symbol is not the first main game length open jackpot symbol, that is, when it is the first main game short open symbol (2A in this example). In step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first short opening command (the second big winning opening C20 of the first main game big hit symbols is short opening as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. A command relating to the start of the special game) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116.

Next, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined start demo time information to the sub side. Next, in step 3118, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demo executing flag and proceeds to step 3120. Even if No in step 3102, the process proceeds to step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the start demo time timer is 0. If Yes in step 3120, in step 3122, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demo running flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demo execution permission flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game execution flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1610). On the other hand, even if No in step 3120, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1610).

Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 19 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2403-1 (second variation 2) to step 2403-11 (second variation 2) and step 2350 (second variation 2), that is, the special game in step 2402. After turning off the middle flag, in step 2403-1 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will start the special game start demo time by turning on the start demo in progress flag. Determines if the flag) is off. Yes in step 2403-1 (second variation 2)
In the case of, the process proceeds to step 2404. Next, in the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2403-2 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) in the start demo display timer and sets the timer. Start. Next, in step 2403-3 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the start demo in progress flag. Next, in step 2350 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the start demo effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 2403-4 (second change 2). In addition, even if No in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-4 (second variation 2).

Next, in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the start demo time timer is 0. In the case of Yes in step 2403-4 (second change 2), in step 2403-5 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the start demo in progress flag and proceeds to step 2412. On the other hand, if No in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

Further, after setting the command related to the jackpot start display in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command related to the distribution start demo time information from the main side in step 2403-6 (second variation 2). Determine if it has been done. In the case of Yes in step 2403-6 (second change 2), in step 2403-7 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a long distribution start demo time (10 seconds in this example). ). In the second modification from the second embodiment, there are two types of time values of the distribution start demo time, that is, the start demo time of the distribution game execution round, long time and short time. In the case of Yes in step 2403-7 (second change 2), in step 2403-8 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not easily enter the ball during the long distribution start demo time. A notification effect (an effect that does not definitely notify the player whether or not the second big winning opening C20 will be open for a long time in the distribution game execution round) is executed, and the step 2403-10 (second change 2) is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-7 (second change 2), in step 2403-9 (second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S enters the ball at the distribution start demo time which is short. Execute an easy notification effect (an effect that definitely informs the player that the second big winning opening C20 will be open for a long time in the distribution game execution round), and shifts to step 2403-10 (second change 2). do. Even if No in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). As described above, in the second embodiment of the change from the second embodiment, in the distribution game execution round related to the first main game symbol, the ball entry easy unnotified effect is executed, and the distribution game related to the second main game symbol is executed. In the execution round, it is configured to execute the ball entry easy notification effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to make a difference between the effect of notifying the easy entry of the ball and the effect of notifying the easy entry of the ball depending on the game state. For example, in the distribution game execution round related to the long open jackpot (5A / 7A) on the first main game side, which is won in the non-time shortened game state and the non-probability variable game state, the ball entry easy unnotified effect is executed. In the distribution game execution round related to the long open jackpot (3B, 5B, 7B) on the second main game side, which is won in the time-shortened game state and the probability fluctuation game state, the ball entry easy notification effect is configured to be executed. May be good. Further, in the present embodiment, the ending effect as described above may be executed, and in such a configuration, the ball entry is not easily notified during the execution of the special game in which the ending effect is executed. It is preferable that the effect and the easy-to-enter ball notification effect are displayed so as not to be noticeable to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw more attention to the ending effect, which is difficult to achieve. Similarly, a hold in-house consecutive villa effect that notifies the player that there is a hold that is a big hit among the holds that exist during the execution of the special game is configured to be executable, and the hold in-house consecutive villa effect is Even when it is executed, it may be configured to display the ball entry easy non-notification effect and the ball entry easy notification effect inconspicuously to the player.

Next, in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game related to the second main game chief open jackpot symbol (2nd variation 2). The second main game chief open jackpot symbols are 3B, 5B and 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2416. On the other hand, if No in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), in step 2403-11 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of winnings (short release). In the case of a big hit in which there is a round to be, the number of rounds is not notified), and the process proceeds to step 2426. As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the second main game chief open jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol in which the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is long open in all rounds. In the jackpot related to, the round being executed is notified at the time of each round (notifying how many rounds are currently being executed), while the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning in any of the rounds. In the big hit where the mouth C20 is short-opened (or in the big hit where the first big winning mouth C10 has a short-opened round), it is configured not to notify the running round at the time of executing each round. If the running round is not notified, an object image (for example, a treasure chest, etc.) corresponding to the number of rounds (actual number of rounds) is displayed in the first large winning opening C10 or the second instead of the display notifying the round. It may be configured to additionally display each time a round in which the large winning opening C20 is opened for a long time is executed. In addition, a plurality of object images are displayed at the start of the special game (or immediately after the start of the special game), and the effect of guaranteeing that the number of rounds corresponding to the number of the object images is long open is executed. You may. It should be noted that the effect may not be executed or may be executed when the special game is executed in which all rounds are open for a long time, but if it is not executed, the number of currently executed rounds is displayed. Is desirable. In any round, in the big hit where the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is short-opened (or in the big hit where the first big winning opening C10 has a short-opening round). The first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 may be configured to notify only the number of rounds in which the long opening is performed (for example, "1st R = long opening, 2nd R = short opening, 3R = long opening". In the case of "open", it is notified in the 3rd R that it is the second round, etc.). The effect to be executed during the execution of the special game is not limited to this, and for example, a big hit is held in a predetermined round (or a distribution game execution round) after the distribution game execution round during the special game execution. If there is a hold that becomes, it may be configured to be able to execute a hold in-house consecutive villa effect that notifies that it is certain that a big hit will be made. In the case of such a configuration, the game state after the end of the special game is not determined (to the specific area C22) when the hold inner consecutive villa effect is executed in the round before the distribution game execution round. Since it has not been decided whether or not to enter the ball), there is a possibility that the symbol change related to the hold that was the target of the notification will be lost even though it was notified that it will be a big hit. It is preferable that the execution timing of the villa effect is after entering the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round or after the distribution game execution round is completed. Further, the distribution game execution round may be any round, and for example, the first round may be configured to be a distribution game execution round (it can also be applied when there is one big winning opening). ..

Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the start demo effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second variation 2) of FIG. 51 in the second embodiment of the modification. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to receive the second long release command from the main side. If Yes in step 2352, the process proceeds to step 2360. On the other hand, if No in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to receive the first long release command from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S notifies that the final production execution lottery (the second big winning opening C20 is opened for a long time in the special game being executed) that is won by 1/5. Execute a lottery to see if or not. Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the final staging execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2358, the process proceeds to step 2360. Next, in step 2360, C of the sub-control board S
As a start demo effect, the PUSC executes a long-opening confirmation notification effect (an effect of notifying that the second large winning opening C20 is long-opened in the special game being executed), and performs the following process {step 2403-4 (first). 2) Process of 2)}. If No in step 2354 (when the first short release command is received from the main side) or No in step 2358, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not have a long open as a start demo effect. The notification effect (the effect of not notifying whether the second big winning opening C20 is long-opened or short-opened in the special game being executed) is executed, and the next process {process of step 2403-4 (second variation 2)}. Move to. In addition, even in the special game start demo time in which the start demo effect is executed, the jackpot on the first main game side (higher percentage) is 10 seconds, and the second main game is the same as in the distribution start demo time. The jackpot on the side (higher percentage of them) may be configured to be 3 seconds.

With the above configuration, in the change example 2 from the second embodiment, in the special game related to the second main game side, the second big prize opening in the distribution game execution round in all the special games. In the special game in which the C20 opens for a long time and is related to the first main game side, a special game in which the second big winning opening C20 opens for a long time and a special game for which the second big winning opening C20 opens for a long time are provided in the distribution game execution round. In the special game on the 2nd main game side, it is notified that the 2nd big prize opening C20 will be open for a long time at the start demo time of the special game, while in the special game on the 1st main game side, the 2nd big prize is won. Even if it is a special game in which the mouth C20 is opened for a long time, it is configured to have a case where the second big winning mouth C20 is notified and a case where it is not notified at the start demo time of the special game, and during the special game. In the special game on the side of the second main game where it is certain that the ball will enter the specific area C22, the player is notified that the second big winning opening C20 will be open for a long time, while the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. In the special game on the side of the first main game, which is not definite, the player is basically instructed whether or not the second big winning opening C20 is open for a long time. By configuring it as such, it is possible to make a highly entertaining gaming machine capable of performing an effect corresponding to the ease of entering the specific area C22.

In the second modification from the second embodiment, the ball entry easy notification effect and the ball entry easy non-notification effect are configured to be executed at the distribution start demo time, but before the distribution game execution round. It may be executed during the execution of the round to be executed (may be executed over a plurality of rounds), or may be executed during the execution of the distribution game execution round.

(Third Embodiment)
In the second embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the game state is changed to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game. The playability that is highly profitable for the player by entering the ball is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration that provides such playability is defined as the third embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 53 is a drawing showing a basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

First, in the third embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and due to the presence of the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port A10 is present. The upper part of the game start port B10 is blocked. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are both the second main game start opening B10. The game ball that is guided to the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start opening A10, and flows down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured so as not to be easily guided to the first main game starting port A10. Both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are the first main game start openings A10. It may be configured to be guided by.

Further, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is likely to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10, and the game area D30. Even if the game balls flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) are difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10, the respective start ports are arranged so as to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10. good. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched on the right side and the left side, respectively.

Here, in the third embodiment, the auxiliary game start port H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30. {However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left side and the right side of the game area D30, respectively)}.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged on the upper right side of the out opening D36, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is , It is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the second big winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape and is out, which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right side of the opening D36 and on the upper right side of the first large winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second major winning opening C20 includes a second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second major winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second major winning opening). The mouth solenoid C26), the upper shielding member C24 that starts driving at the start of the small hit game and can hinder the flow of the game ball to the lower shielding member C25, and the upper shielding member C24 that starts driving when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the game ball A lower shielding member C25 that can hinder the flow to the V winning opening C27, a winning opening C27 that triggers a transition to a special game by entering a ball during a small hit game, and a V winning opening C27. The V winning slot entry detection device C27s for detecting the entry of a game ball, the second major winning opening ejection port C23 for discharging the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening C20, and the second major It is provided with a second large winning opening discharge detection device C23s for detecting the entry of a game ball into the winning opening discharge port C23. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second major winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second major winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second major winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second major winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easily won. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advanced state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10). The internal structure of the second prize opening C20 will be described later.

Next, FIG. 54 is an operation diagram relating to the second special winning opening C20 in the third embodiment, and more specifically, the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C24 provided in the second special winning opening C20. FIG. 3 is an action diagram relating to whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 based on the opening mode and the closing mode of the member C25. In the third embodiment, the game ball is inserted into the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit game execution.
If you keep firing toward (if you keep hitting right), it is configured so that multiple game balls enter the second big winning opening C20 {For example, the second big winning opening C20 (first) The opening mode of the two major winning openings electric accessory C21d) is "0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed"}, so go to the V winning opening C27. Whether or not the game ball can be entered is determined by whether or not the game ball in the second large winning opening C20 matches well with the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25. Hereinafter, the action of the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit game will be described in detail.

First, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the second large winning opening C20 enters the second large winning opening C20 inside (as a flow path of a game ball inside the second large winning opening C20). The second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting a ball, the V winning opening C27, the V winning opening winning detection device C22s for detecting the entry into the V winning opening C27, and the V winning opening C27 are not entered. It is equipped with a second large winning port discharge port C23, which is a discharge flow path for the game ball, and a second large winning port discharge detection device C23s for detecting entry into the second large winning port discharge port C23. The lower shielding member C25 provided above the V winning opening C27 and the upper shielding member C24 provided above the lower shielding member C25 are provided, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are provided from the game board ( A closed state in which the fall of the game ball can be hindered or easily hindered by being in a protruding state (advanced state) when viewed from the player, and retracted into the game board (back side when viewed from the player). It is configured to be in an open state where the fall of the game ball cannot be hindered or difficult to hinder (the game ball can fall) when it is in the state of being in the state (evacuated state) (like a so-called tongue-type attacker). Configuration). More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the upper shielding member C24 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or is difficult to reach the lower shielding member C25, and when the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state. The game ball is reachable or easy to reach the lower shielding member C25, and when the lower shielding member C25 is in the closed state, the game ball is unreachable or difficult to reach the V winning opening C27, and the lower shielding member When the C25 is in the open state, the game ball is configured to be reachable or easy to reach the V winning opening C27. Next, a specific flow path of the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit game execution will be described.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening C20 during the small hit game is closed after passing through the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s. It is guided to the member C24 and stops in a region (referred to as a stop region) formed by the inner wall surface of the upper shield member C24 and the second large winning opening C20 (placed on the upper shield member C24). In the present embodiment, since the stop area is configured so that only one game ball can be placed, a certain game ball is placed in the stop area as shown in FIG. 54 (a). If so, the game ball guided into the second prize opening C20 after the placement timing of the certain game ball collides with the certain game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the flow path (V winning opening C27) that reaches the second large winning opening discharge detection device C23s and the second large winning opening discharge port C23 without passing through the upper shielding member C24. It is configured to be guided to the flow path) (note that the stop area is configured so that the certain game ball is not pulled out from the stop area due to the impact when the other game ball collides. Has been). Here, the right part of FIG. 54 (a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the XX cross section of FIG. 54 (a). As shown in the cross-sectional view, in FIG. 54 (a), both the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are in a closed state {a state in which they protrude from the game board (toward the front side when viewed from the player) (the cross-sectional view). In this case, it is understood that the game ball can be placed on the upper shielding member C24.

In the third embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 is set to be opened after a certain time from the start of the small hit game (in this example, 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game), and the lower shielding member is set. The C25 is configured to repeat the transition between the closed state and the open state at a fixed cycle (4 seconds cycle in this example) from the time when the power is turned on (the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 is periodic). The possibility of entering the lower V winning opening C27 is mainly determined by the timing at which the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state (in other words, the timing at which the small hit game starts) (the lower shielding member C25 determines. When the small hit game in which the timing of the open state and the timing of the upper shielding member C24 are scheduled to be substantially coincided with each other is started, the game ball may enter the V winning opening C27).

The third embodiment is merely an example, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are in a state where the fall of the game ball cannot be hindered or is difficult to be hindered, and a state in which the fall of the game ball can be hindered or easily hindered. , Can be any structure as long as it can be transitioned, and other configurations are not limited in any way.

In the third embodiment, two shielding members, an upper shielding member C24 and a lower shielding member C25, are provided to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning opening C27, but the present invention is not limited to one. The shielding member may be configured to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning opening C27. Further, also in the gaming machine shown in the second embodiment, in which the gaming ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the gaming machine shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game. A shielding member that hinders the entry of the game ball into the C22 may be provided. In such a configuration, the opening mode of the shielding member may be configured to differ depending on the jackpot symbol that triggered the jackpot. In such a configuration, (1) shielding in the distribution game execution round. As an opening mode of the member, the shielding member changes from the closed state to the open state 50 ms after the start timing of the distribution game execution round or at the start timing of the distribution game execution round regardless of the jackpot symbol. (2) Distribution game execution round. The shielding member may be configured to change from the open state to the closed state at a timing 200 ms after the end timing of the above (depending on the jackpot symbol, it may be after 200 ms or after 3000 ms), and it shall be configured as such. As a result, the distribution game execution round ends rather than the period from the start of the distribution game execution round to the first opening of the shielding member, where there is a timing when the shielding member opens regardless of the jackpot symbol. It can be configured so that the period from the time when the shielding member is finally closed to the time when the shielding member is finally closed is longer.

Next, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the third embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are step 1700 (third), step 1750 (third), step 3450 (third) and step 1950 (third). That is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later in step 1700 (third). Next, in step 1750 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the upper shielding member drive control process described later. Next, in step 3450 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the lower shielding member drive control process described later. Next, in step 1950 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the V winning opening ball entry determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1997.

Next, FIG. 56 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart. The differences from the present embodiment are step 1403 (third), 1410-3 (third), step 1434 (third) and step 1436 (third), that is, in step 1403 (third). The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied (in the third embodiment, it is added that the small hit game is not being executed as the fluctuation start condition). In step 1403 (third), if Yes, the process proceeds to step 1405, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1419. Further, after determining the stop symbol related to the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1410-3 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, and the game state. The variation mode (or variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

If the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1434 (third) whether or not the stop symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1434 (third), in step 1436 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, even if No in step 1434 (third), the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, FIG. 57 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) is an example of the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-B) in the third embodiment. Is. In the third embodiment, the table contents to be referred to differ only depending on whether the symbol variation is related to the first main game side or the symbol variation related to the second main game side, regardless of the gaming state. There is. Further, it is configured so that a small hit can be won together with the first main game side and the second main game side, and the result of the winning / failing lottery on the second main game side is almost (with a probability of 1020/1024) a small hit. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this. Further, when a small hit is won, one main game symbol is determined as a small hit symbol from one type of the first main game side and two types of main game symbol candidates on the second main game side. ing. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. However, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) in FIG. 18 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1681-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by the entry of the ball into the V winning opening C27 (in the third embodiment, a small hit). The special game is configured to be executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the game). In the case of Yes in step 1681-1, in step 1681-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a jackpot symbol whose stop symbol is a time-saving jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that shifts to a time-shortened game state after the execution of the special game is completed, and this example. Then, it is determined whether or not it is 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1681-2, the process proceeds to step 1681-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1681-1, in step 1681-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M is changed to the time-saving small hit symbol (the special game is shifted to the time-reduced game state after the execution of the special game is completed). It is a small hit symbol that triggers the transition to, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by 7AK / 7BK). If Yes in step 1681-4, the process proceeds to step 1681-5.

Next, in step 1681-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1681-6 and step 1681-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and shifts to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}. do. If No in step 1681-2, in other words, if the stop symbol is 4A, which is a time-saving big hit symbol, or if No in step 1681-4, in other words, 2BK, which is a time-saving small hit symbol, is an opportunity. Even after the special game is completed, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}. The processing related to the limited frequency (step 1411, subroutine of step 1450, step 1413, step 1431) has been deleted.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1701, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a discharge waiting flag {a flag that is turned on in step 1722 described later, that is, a planned small hit game (particularly, the planned second large). Whether or not the flag that is turned on during the discharge waiting period (discharge waiting time) of the game balls remaining in the second major winning opening C20 after the execution of the winning opening C20 opening pattern) is turned off. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1701, in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1705, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the opening pattern of the second big winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in all the small hit symbols, "0.2 seconds opening → 0. 8 seconds closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed ”, and if the game ball continues to be fired toward the 2nd big winning opening C20, the game ball will be in the 2nd big winning opening C20. It is configured to enter multiple balls). Next, in step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M launches a small hit execution start command (a command indicating that the small hit game has started, and the player launches a game ball toward the second large winning opening C20. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second large winning opening C20 and starts the small hit game timer MP41t (timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1709, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1712. In the third embodiment, the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, so that the discharge waits for a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) from the start of the small hit. It is configured to end the waiting time {Of course, the method of measuring the discharge waiting time is not limited to this, for example, the planned small hit game (in particular, the planned second big winning opening C20). The measurement may be started after the execution of the open pattern) is completed.

On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712.

Next, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a winning (winning) of the game ball in the second large winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 1712, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there are a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the second large winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1714, the process proceeds to step 1718. On the other hand, if No in step 1712 or 1714, in step 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M has elapsed a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) related to opening the large winning opening with reference to the timer MP41t for small hit games. Determine if it has been done. If Yes in step 1716, the process proceeds to step 1718.

Next, in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops driving the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d and closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge waiting flag (the discharge standby time starts from the main processing execution timing), and proceeds to step 1724. Even if No in step 1701, the process proceeds to step 1724.

Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge standby time end value (10 seconds in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1724, in step 1725, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge waiting flag. Next, in step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750 (third)}. Even if No in step 1710, step 1716 or step 1724, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750 (third)}.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M has an upper shielding member in a predetermined drive pattern (in this example, a pattern of repeating “5 seconds closed → 1 second open → 24 seconds closed”). The driving of C24 is started, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of 1800 in step). There is no problem even if the drive pattern of the upper shielding member C24 is changed, but in this example, the game ball wins a V prize only when the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 match. Since it is configured so that the ball can be entered into the mouth C27, the opening time may be a long time such as 3 seconds, or the ball may not be opened for 10 seconds or more from the start of driving, so that the ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening C27. It is desirable not to configure it. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, in step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the upper shielding member C24 and ends the drive, and the next process {step 3450 (third). Process}. As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 starts driving with the start of the small hit game (start of opening of the second large winning opening C20 related to the small hit), and triggers the end of the small hit game. The small hit game is terminated before the upper shielding member C24 is driven once by the opening pattern of the upper shielding member C24, and the driving of the upper shielding member C24 is terminated. .. Since the small hit game has a discharge waiting time, the small hit game does not end until the discharge waiting time ends even after the opening of the second large winning opening C20 related to the small hit game is completed. It will be.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the lower shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 3450 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3452, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the lower shielding member C25 in a constant drive pattern (in this example, a pattern of repeating "closed for 3 seconds → open for 1 second") after the power is turned on. , The process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1950 (third)}. As described above, the upper shielding member C24 is configured to start driving when the small hit game is started, whereas the lower shielding member C25 is configured to start driving when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the V winning opening ball entry determination process according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a conditional device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960 described later, that is, a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the discharge standby time. It is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on in the case) is off. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening C27. In the case of Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M is within the V winning opening valid period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge standby time related to the small hit game). Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a V winning detection command (a command for executing the V winning detection effect, which will be described later) to the sub-main control unit SM side. Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1960, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation reservation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

On the other hand, if No in step 1952, in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a V winning opening valid period (a period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game). Determines if is finished. In the case of Yes in step 1962, in step 1964, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Further, in the case of No in step 1956, in other words, when the risk of illegal entry such as a game ball entering the V winning opening C27 is increased even though the small hit game is not executed. It is preferable to configure it to execute error processing as appropriate. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game related to the ball entering the V winning opening C27 is "15R", and the series of flow of "small hit game → special game related to entering the V winning opening C27" is totaled. Then, the number of rounds related to the small hit game is "1R" and the number of rounds related to the special game is "15R", which is "16R".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side according to the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 63 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3A is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The changes from this embodiment are step 2001 (third) and step 2003 (third). That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 2001 (third), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the power-on timer SM24t and starts. The power-on timer SM24t is provided to grasp the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Next, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, when RAM clear information is received → sub-side). When the RAM is initialized and various information commands are received → The production-related information at the time of power failure is reset to the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 2003 (third), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S restores the number of holds (for example, the drawing hold counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). It should be noted that the effect being executed, information related to the special symbol, etc. are not restored, and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next fluctuation. After that, the process proceeds to a loop process in which the CPUSC iterative process routine (b) of the sub-control board S is repeatedly executed. The changes from this embodiment are step 2500 (third) and step 2550 (third). That is, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-mentioned decorative symbol display control process. Next, in step 2500 (third), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the V winning detection effect display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2400. Further, after executing the special game-related display control process in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the small hit game-related display control process described later in step 2550 (third), and proceeds to step 2900. .. The stay stage determination process in step 2050 has been deleted.

Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 (third) in FIG. 63 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a small hit execution start command (command related to the start of the small hit game) has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prompts a right-handed instruction effect {a game ball is launched (execution of right-handed) toward the second big winning opening C20 during the small hit game. The command related to the effect} is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900), and the process proceeds to step 2506. On the other hand, step 250
Even in the case of No in 2, the process proceeds to step 2506. Next, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the CPUSC of the sub-control board S to notify the player of the V winning detection command (to notify the player that the game ball has entered the V winning opening C27) from the main side. It is determined whether or not the command (command for executing the V winning detection effect), which is the effect of the above, has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the V winning detection effect (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). , The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, even if No in step 2506, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400). In addition, since the V winning detection effect is an effect of notifying the player that the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 and then the special game is executed, the effect content is an effect of congratulating the player. It is desirable that the content and the effect content for notifying the player that it is highly profitable. For example, the effect is such that "V" is displayed on the effect display device SG in the full display area SG10.

Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the small hit game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (third) in FIG. 63 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the small hit medium flag is off. If Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the small hit start display (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). ..

Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the small hit medium flag and shifts to step 2564. Even if No in step 2552, the process proceeds to step 2564. Next, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a small hit end command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2564, in step 2566, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the small hit end display (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). .. Next, in step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the small hit medium flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2900). Even if No in step 2554 or step 2564, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Action)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the operation related to winning the V winning opening C27 in the third embodiment will be described. First, in the figure, when a hold related to a small hit occurs, the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is performed after the hold related to the small hit occurs, which is calculated based on the number of holds at the time of determining the fluctuation time. It is an action diagram exemplifying the relationship between the time until the start (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "the time to reach the opening of the upper shielding member") and the ease of entering the ball into the V winning opening C27. .. In this example, a case where a hold related to a small hit occurs during a certain symbol change in which two holds related to loss exist is illustrated. In this example, the order of holding is "1st holding-> 2nd holding-> 3rd holding" (the 3rd holding is a holding related to a small hit). In the following, the time from the occurrence of the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) to the end of the changing symbol change is the same (2 seconds), and the first hold symbol change start. The timing and the random number value of the variable mode determination random number of the first hold to the third hold are the same (for example, the random number value of the variable mode determination random number of the first hold and the second hold is 799, and the random number of the variable mode determination random number of the third hold is the same. It is assumed that the random number value of is 1023).

First, when a hold related to a small hit occurs during a symbol change in which there are two holds related to loss, a third hold (= hold related to a small hit) occurs as the upper shielding member opening arrival time. From to the time until the end of the symbol change during change; with the fluctuation time of the first hold; with the fluctuation time of the second hold; with the fluctuation time of the third hold (= hold related to the small hit); It is calculated as the total time from the time until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started and;

Next, referring to the table at the top of the figure, the third hold (= hold related to small hits) is set during the symbol change in which there are two holds related to loss (first hold and second hold). In the situation where it occurred, as pattern A, when the launch of the game ball is stopped after the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) occurs {especially after the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) occurs Is when a new hold does not occur} and when the upper shielding member opening arrival time and, as pattern B, the launch of the game ball is continued after the occurrence of the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) {especially the third When a new hold occurs after the hold (= hold related to a small hit) occurs}, the time to reach the opening of the upper shielding member is illustrated.

In pattern A, no new hold occurs after the third hold (= hold related to small hit) occurs, and when the fluctuation time related to the first hold is determined, the number of holds is 2 {second hold and second hold. 3 hold (= hold related to small hit)}, and when the fluctuation time related to the 2nd hold is determined, the number of holds is 1 {3rd hold (= hold related to small hit)}, and the 3rd hold (=) When the fluctuation time related to (holding related to small hits) is determined, the number of holdings is 0. In this case, referring to the lottery table for determining the first main game change mode in FIG. 13, the time from the occurrence of the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) to the end of the changing symbol change is 2 seconds. The fluctuation time of the first hold is 5 seconds; the fluctuation time of the second hold is 10 seconds; the fluctuation time of the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) is 60 seconds; the small hit game. The time from the start to the start of opening the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the time to reach the opening of the upper shielding member is 82 seconds.

Next, in pattern B, after the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) occurs, two new holds occur after the start of the symbol change of the first hold and before the start of the symbol change of the second hold. In this case, the number of holds is 2 {second hold and third hold (= hold related to small hit)} when the variable time related to the first hold is determined, and the number of holds when the variable time related to the second hold is decided. Is 3 {3rd hold (= hold related to small hits) and 2 newly generated holds}, and the number of holds is 2 when the fluctuation time related to the 3rd hold (= hold related to small hits) is determined. It becomes the number (the two newly generated hold). In this case, referring to the lottery table for determining the first main game change mode in FIG. 13, in pattern B, from the occurrence of the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) to the end of the change of the symbol. The time of the first hold is 2 seconds; the fluctuation time of the first hold is 5 seconds; the fluctuation time of the second hold is 5 seconds; the fluctuation time of the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) is 60 seconds. Yes; the time from the start of the small hit game to the start of opening of the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the time to reach the opening of the upper shielding member is 77 seconds.

Here, as described above, the ease of entering the V winning opening C27 (whether or not the game ball can enter the V winning opening C27) depends on the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Is determined by whether or not they match well. That is, by referring to the opening arrival time of the upper shielding member and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25, whether or not it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 during the small hit game related to the patterns A and B. It is possible to determine in advance whether or not.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the opening mode (closing mode) of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening mode (closing mode) of the lower shielding member C25 in each of the pattern A and the pattern B (the lower shielding member C25 is a power source. It is a timing chart showing that the opening and closing are repeated periodically from the time of putting in.). In this timing chart, the elapsed time from the third hold (= hold related to small hits) occurrence timing is illustrated with reference to the third hold (= hold related to small hits) occurrence timing. Further, as an opening mode (closing mode) of the lower shielding member C25, the elapsed time from the occurrence timing of the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) is from "4n + 1 (seconds)" to ".
It is assumed that it will be in the open state during the period of "4n + 2 (seconds)" (n is an integer).

As shown in this timing chart, in the pattern A, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is the timing at which 82 seconds have elapsed from the timing at which the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) occurs. When the time required for the game ball to reach the lower shielding member C25 from the position of the upper shielding member C24 (0.2 seconds in this example) is added, it becomes 82.2 seconds, and the 82.2 seconds is "4n + 1 (seconds)". It is out of the range of "4n + 2 (seconds)" (n is an integer). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 do not match, and when the upper shielding member C24 is opened, the game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls. Since the lower shield member C25 is not opened when the lower shield member C25 is reached, it becomes difficult to enter the V winning opening C27 located downstream of the lower shield member C25 (V by the lower shield member C25). Entry into the winning opening C27 is likely to be hindered). On the other hand, in the pattern B, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is the timing when 77 seconds have elapsed from the timing at which the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) occurs, and the game ball is the upper shielding member C24. When the time from the position of to the lower shielding member C25 (0.2 seconds in this example) is added, it becomes 77.2 seconds, and the 77.2 seconds are "4n + 1 (seconds)" to "4n + 2 (seconds)". (N is an integer) (n = 19). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 match, and when the upper shielding member C24 is opened, the game ball mounted on the upper shielding member C24 falls and lowers. Since the lower shield member C25 is opened when the shield member C25 is reached, it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 located downstream of the lower shield member C25 (depending on the lower shield member C25, a game ball). It is difficult to prevent the ball from entering the V winning opening C27). In the case of the pattern A and the pattern B, the above-mentioned firing continuation instruction effect is executed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, as pattern A, no new hold occurs from the occurrence of the hold related to the small hit to the start of the symbol change related to the small hit (the number of holds is two). In the above state, it is difficult to start the symbol fluctuation = the time from the occurrence of the hold related to the small hit to the start of the opening of the upper shielding member C24 tends to be long), and the small hit as the pattern B. A new hold occurs from the occurrence of the hold related to the small hit to the start of the symbol change related to the small hit (the state where the number of holds is 2 or more is always maintained and the symbol change is likely to start = small The opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 may change depending on whether the time from the occurrence of the hold related to the hit to the start of opening of the upper shielding member C24 tends to be short). Further, due to such a change in the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24, it is possible to change whether or not the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 match well. If a small hit is won, it can be a highly entertaining gaming machine that pays attention to whether or not to enter the V winning opening C27.

In the third embodiment, all the variable times that can be executed corresponding to the number of holdes at the time of hold digestion are confirmed based on the variable mode determination random number of the hold that exists at the time when the hold related to the small hit occurs. Then, based on the result, the time from the occurrence of the hold related to the small hit to the start of opening of the upper shielding member C24 is calculated in advance, and the calculated result and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 are calculated. , (Furthermore, the time required for the game ball to reach the lower shielding member C25 from the position of the upper shielding member C24 is taken into consideration), so that it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 in the small hit game. (Matching the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 with the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25), predicting a change in the desired number of holdings (at what timing and how much holding is desirable). Is possible. If the ball is configured in this way and it is possible to enter the V winning opening C27 during the execution of the small hit game related to the hold at the time of the occurrence of the hold that becomes the small hit, the combination of the variable times during which the ball can be entered. It may be configured so that the player can be notified of the firing mode (or the desired change in the number of holdings) of the game ball which is likely to be, and by such a configuration, the game is played to the V winning opening C27 in the small hit game. It is possible to create a novel playability in which whether or not the ball enters can be determined by the technical intervention of the player.

In addition, in the third embodiment, by configuring so that the determined fluctuation time can be different depending on the number of reservations when determining the fluctuation time of the main game symbol, after the reservation that becomes a small hit occurs. The time until the lower shielding member C25 is opened can be changed to enable the player's technical intervention, but the time from the occurrence of the small hit hold to the opening of the lower shielding member C25 is set. , The configuration that can be different depending on the technical intervention of the player is not limited to this, and for example, (1) the change of the main game symbol is forcibly stopped by the player's pressing, and the stop symbol is displayed. A variable shortening button is provided, and the time is different depending on the timing at which the button is pressed. (2) Both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are simultaneously and in parallel. When a parallel lottery that is lotterable (and variable) can be executed and the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol becomes a small hit symbol, the small hit symbol related to the small hit symbol is used. The period during which the game is being executed may be configured to suspend the fluctuation time (elapsed time of the fluctuation time) of the first main game symbol, and to make the time different.

In the third embodiment, the small hit symbol is configured to have a specific entrance for starting the small hit game when the game ball enters after the small hit symbol is stopped, and the small hit symbol is stopped. , When a predetermined condition (for example, a specific small hit symbol is stopped, etc.) is satisfied, the launch timing of the game ball so that the game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 during the small hit game execution. Can be executed (for example, on the effect display device SG, "If you enter the specific entry slot now, you will have a great chance to enter the V winning slot !!") can be executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the third embodiment, as the specific gaming state, there is a probability-variable gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery result is advantageous to the player as compared with the non-probability-variable gaming state, and the second major prize is won during the special game. It is configured to have a distribution game execution round which is a round in which the mouth C20 is opened, and by entering the V winning mouth C27 during the distribution game execution round, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game. It may be configured as such (a so-called ball sure game as illustrated in the second embodiment). Further, in such a configuration, in the round before the distribution game execution round, the game launch timing of the game ball so that the game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 in the distribution game execution round. It is desirable to configure it so that it is possible to perform an effect of notifying a person (for example, on the effect display device SG, "If you enter the second big prize opening now, a big chance of a certain change !!" is displayed). ..

(Example 1 of change from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the game property in which the special game is executed by the game ball entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit game is illustrated, but such a configuration is the first. 3 Not limited to the embodiment. Therefore, the configuration having the game property that the special game is executed by the game ball entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit game different from the third embodiment is changed from the third embodiment. As Example 1, only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 67 is a main flowchart showing the main game symbol display process in the first modification from the third embodiment. In step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)}, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine, and the next process ( Step 1550 process). The gaming machine in the first modification from the third embodiment is configured to be digested in the order of entry (the order in which the hold occurs is digested from the previous one).

Next, FIG. 68 shows step 1400 (1) of FIG. 67 in the first modification of the third embodiment.
, (2) is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process. First, the change from the third embodiment is step 1405-1 (third variation 1), that is, if the fluctuation start condition is satisfied in step 1403, step 1405-1 (third variation 1). Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads out the random number on the main game side related to the hold that has occurred earliest among the hold that has occurred (all the hold between the first main game side and the second main game side). , Step 1406.

Next, FIG. 69 is the main game table 3 according to the first modification from the third embodiment. In the change example 1 from the third embodiment, in the time shortened gaming state, the average value of the fluctuation time related to the hit on the first main game side is larger than the average value of the fluctuation time related to the hit on the second main game side. It's been a long time. Further, in the time-reduced gaming state, the shortest fluctuation time related to the hit on the first main game side is longer than the shortest fluctuation time related to the hit on the second main game side. That is, in the time-reduced gaming state, the average value of the fluctuation time related to the big hit on the first main game side is longer than the average value of the fluctuation time related to the small hit on the second main game side. Further, in the time-reduced gaming state, the shortest fluctuation time related to the big hit on the first main game side is longer than the shortest fluctuation time related to the small hit on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process of step 1500 in FIG. 68 in the first modification of the third embodiment. The changes in the change example 1 of the third embodiment are from step 1530 (third change 1) to step 1542 (third change 1), that is, after turning off the auxiliary game time reduction flag in step 1518, step 1530. In (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the second main game time reduction counter (counter subtracted only at the end of the symbol change of the second main game symbol) to zero, and steps 1532 (third change 1). Move to 1). Even if No in step 1510, the process proceeds to step 1532 (third variation 1).

Next, in step 1532 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the second main game time reduction counter is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1532 (second variation 1), in step 1534 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the second main game time reduction counter value (decrement in this example). .. Next, in step 1536 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game time reduction counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1536 (third change 1), in step 1538 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1540 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1542 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time reduction counter to zero and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550). On the other hand, even if No in step 1532 (third variation 1) or step 1536 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). As described above, in the change example 1 from the third embodiment, the time reduction counter value is subtracted by the change of the first main game symbol and the change of the second main game symbol, and only the change of the second main game symbol is used. The second main game time reduction counter value is subtracted.

Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of step 1650 (third) of FIG. 17 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are from step 1682-1 (third variation 1) to step 1682-4 (third variation 1), that is, in step 1681-1, the ball enters the V winning opening C27. If it is not after the end of the special game that triggered the game, in step 1682-1 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol as a long-time-short jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol with a relatively large number of time-savings). , In this example, it is determined that it is 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A and 7B). If Yes in step 1682-1 (3rd variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1681-5, and if No in step 1682-1 (3rd variation 1), in other words, the stop symbol is a short-time short jackpot symbol (3rd variation 1). It is a big hit symbol with a relatively large number of time reductions, and in this example, it is 4
In the case of A), in step 1682-2 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the special game that is currently won in the non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 1682-2 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) as the time reduction number counter value. Next, in step 1682-4 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (10 times in this example) as the second main game time reduction counter value, and steps 1681-6. Move to. If the result is No in step 1682-2 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1681-5. With this configuration, when the short-time short-time jackpot symbol is won in the non-time-reduced game state, the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game is the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the second main. It is configured to end when either the total number of changes of the game symbol is 30 times or the number of changes of the second main game symbol is 10 times. If the short-time short-time jackpot symbol is won in the time-reduced game state (including the time-reduced game state after the special game related to the short-time short-time jackpot symbol), the time-reduced game state is 100 times after the end of the special game. (The total of the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the number of changes in the second main game symbol ends in 100 times).

With the above configuration, when the short-time short-time jackpot symbol is won, the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game is the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the number of changes in the second main game symbol. By configuring the game to end when either the total of 30 times or the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol is 10 times is satisfied, the second main game side is in the time-reduced game state. Even if the symbol change on the first main game side is mistakenly executed in the game property that the symbol change is changed 10 times, the second main game time reduction counter is not subtracted, so that the second main game time reduction counter is not subtracted. A more user-friendly gaming machine can be made by configuring the game so that the game can be continued without losing the right to be changed 10 times by the symbol change on the main game side.

(Fourth Embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the special game is started by entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit, but the configuration of the gaming machine provided with the small hit is limited to this. Not done. Therefore, the configuration having a small hit different from that of the third embodiment is defined as the fourth embodiment, and the differences from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 72 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is that there is only one large winning opening, and the V winning opening C27, the upper shielding member C24, and the lower shielding member C25 are not provided, so that the shielding member drive processing and the V winning opening C27 are different. Do not execute the ball entry determination process.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 72 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is step 1249 (fourth), that is, when the auxiliary game symbol is a hit symbol in step 1230, in step 1249 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set. Based on the winning symbol and the gaming state, the opening mode of the electric accessory is determined, a predetermined time is set in the opening timer, and the process proceeds to step 1234.

Next, FIG. 74 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 10 in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart. The difference from the third embodiment is 1410-3 (4th), step 1500 (4th) and step 3350 (4th), that is, after the stop symbol is determined in step 1410-2, step 1410-. In 3 (4th), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the result of the main game symbol winning / failing lottery, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), the game state, and the game state. The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the set limited frequency type, and the process proceeds to step 1414. Further, after turning on the condition device flag in step 1432, or after turning on the small hit flag in step 1436 (third), or after turning on the small hit flag in step 1434 (fourth), the stop symbol is not a small hit symbol (loss). In the case of (design), in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process described later. Next, in step 3350 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550).

Next, FIG. 75 (main game table 3) is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the fourth embodiment. be. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol, the main game time reduction flag state, and the set limited frequency type. It is configured to be. That is, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a big hit, it is easy to determine the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction game state), it is relative. It is configured so that it is easy to determine the variation mode in which the variation time is short. Further, when the second limited frequency is set (for example, after the end of the special game related to the big hit symbol "7B") as shown in the variation mode at the time of loss and the small hit, the 0th limited frequency is set. It is configured so that a relatively short-time variation mode is selected as compared with the case where the first limited frequency is set (for example, after the end of the special game related to the jackpot symbol other than the jackpot symbol "7B"). In particular, in the case of a small hit, the difference in the fluctuation time between the second limited frequency time and the first limited frequency time is large, and the difference is the second limited frequency time and the first limited time in the case of a loss. It is relatively larger than the difference in the fluctuation time (average value) from the frequency time. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, it is not configured to have different tables according to the number of reserved balls, but it goes without saying that it may be configured to have different tables according to the number of reserved balls. do not have. Further, it may be configured so that the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side is relatively long in the time shortening game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) {the symbol on the second main game side. When the variation is configured to be advantageous to the player, the second main game side is likely to be put on hold by lowering the symbol variation efficiency of the first main game side (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}. Further, although the variation mode related to the small hit on the first main game side is configured to be only one type, the variation mode is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of variation modes may be provided (particularly, the game state and the set). It is preferable to configure so that different variation modes can be selected based on the limited frequency type being used).

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1508, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1508, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value (number of remaining time reductions) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516 and step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and shifts to the next process {process of step 3350 (fourth)}. do. Even if No in step 1508, step 1510, or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 3350 (fourth)}.

Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination process according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c (counter that manages the number of changes of the main game symbol in the limited frequency state) is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c by 1. Next, in step 3356, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value (remaining limited frequency number of times) of the limited frequency counter MN52c is 0.

In the case of Yes in step 3356, in step 3358, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently set limited frequency type is the second limited frequency. In the case of Yes in step 3358, in step 3360, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type. Next, in step 3362, the CPUMC of the main control board M has the first specified number of times as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c (for example, 65535 times, but the first limited frequency is continued until the next big hit. Yes, other than this, an extremely large value or ∞ times may be set), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600). As described above, when a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 70 times, which will be described later) has elapsed in the second limited frequency state, the state is configured to shift to the first limited frequency state.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3358, that is, in the 0th limited frequency state (excluded because it is not realistic to end the 1st limited frequency state), a predetermined number of fluctuations (described later, for example, 50). When the number of times is equal to the upper limit of the time reduction game state) has elapsed, in step 3364, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set limited frequency type (almost at the same time, the time reduction game state). Will be terminated), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 3352 or 3356, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (fourth) in FIG. 17 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1653-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (for example, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1653-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1653-2.

Next, in step 1653-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1653-3, in step 1653-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stored in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second specific number of times (for example, 70 times) as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1653-11. In this example, the game is configured to shift to the second limited frequency state (a state advantageous to the player) only at the end of the special game related to the big hit on the second main game side, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. However, by configuring the second main game side to be more likely to shift to a state advantageous to the player than the first main game side, the player can be affected by the probability-variable game state and / or the time-reduced game state. The advantageous state and the effect overlap, and it becomes possible to increase the excitement of the player.

On the other hand, if No in step 1653-3, in step 1653-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stored in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the limited frequency counter MN.
The value of 52c is the first specified number of times (for example, 65535 times, but the purpose is to continue the first limited frequency until the next big hit, and other extremely large values or ∞ times may be used. ) Is set, and the process proceeds to step 1653-11.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1653-1, that is, at the end of the special game related to the non-probability change jackpot, in step 1653-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a predetermined number of times as the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. (For example, 50 times) is set. Next, in step 1653-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the 0th limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stored in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the 0th specific number of times (for example, 50 times which is the same value as the time reduction number) as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1653-11. do. That is, it is configured to set the first limited frequency or the second limited frequency when shifting to the stochastic variable gaming state, and set the 0th limited frequency when not shifting to the stochastic variable gaming state.

Next, in steps 1653-11 and 1653-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the fourth embodiment. In this example, for convenience of explanation, an example in which small hits occur regularly at an average fluctuation interval (small hits occur once in about 11 fluctuations) is given. Further, the firing interval of the game balls according to the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds per ball (100 balls per minute), and is about while the large winning opening C10 related to the small hit game is opened for 1.7 seconds. It is assumed that three game balls will enter the large winning opening C10.

First, as shown in the section (a) of the figure, in the non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state, the difference between the number of fired game balls and the prize ball due to the entry into the first main game start port A10. As a result, the number of balls held by the player gradually decreases.

Next, as shown in the section of the figure (b), during the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the prize ball by entering the big winning opening C10 is paid out, so that the player has it. The number of spheres will increase. Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "5A" is completed, the game becomes a probability fluctuation / time shortening game state, and the first limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 3C, in the probability fluctuation / time shortening gaming state (first limited frequency), a small hit has a probability of 97/1024 (= once in about 11 fluctuations). When the prize ball is paid out by entering the large winning opening C10 related to the small hit, the number of balls held by the player increases (slowly increases as compared with the above-mentioned special game). Here, in the section (c), 33 symbol fluctuations are executed in about 65 seconds (a prize ball of about 117 balls is acquired by three small hits).

Next, as shown in the section of the figure (d), during the special game related to the big hit symbol "7B", the prize ball by entering the big prize opening C10 is paid out, so that the player has it. The number of spheres will increase. Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, the game becomes a probability fluctuation / time shortening game state, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

Next, as shown in the section of the figure (e), in the probability fluctuation / time shortening gaming state (first limited frequency), a small hit has a probability of 97/1024 (= once in about 11 fluctuations). When the prize ball is paid out by entering the large winning opening C10 related to the small hit, the number of balls held by the player increases (slowly increases as compared with the above-mentioned special game). Here, in the section (e), 33 symbol fluctuations are executed in about 23 seconds (by 3 small hits).
Approximately 117 prize balls will be won). That is, the number of prize balls (or their expected value) obtained by a small hit is the same in the same number of fluctuations as compared with the first limited frequency, but the time to digest the fluctuation of the same number of fluctuations is short. Therefore, it can be made to appear as if it is in a highly profitable state for the player. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, the number of game balls fired in 65 seconds is about 108, and the number of game balls fired in 23 seconds is about 38. Therefore, as the rate of entry into the second main game start port B10 is lower, the game balls fired within the time for digesting the same number of fluctuations are lost. Therefore, the second limited frequency time is higher than the first limited frequency time. It should be added that the profitability is actually high for the player.

Next, FIG. 80 is a timing chart relating to the transition of the gaming state in the fourth embodiment. First, in the non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening game state, the special game of 8R is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol "5A" at the timing of 1 in the figure. ..

Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "5A" is completed, the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state are set, and the first limited frequency is set. It should be noted that, basically, the change of the second main game symbol is executed during the time shortening game state.

Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the small hit game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed by the small hit symbol "BK" (probability fluctuation during the small hit game). The game state and the time reduction game state are not switched).

Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the special game of 16R is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol “7B”. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to non-probability (non-probability variable game state), and the variable time is switched to non-time reduction (non-time shortened game state).

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state, and the second limited frequency is set. To. Here, the state in which the second limited frequency is set (sometimes referred to as the second limited frequency state) continues for a maximum of 70 fluctuations, and the fluctuation time of the main game symbol (variation time at the time of loss and small hit). ), It is a state in which the shorter time is likely to be shorter than the state in which the first limited frequency is set (sometimes referred to as the first limited frequency state). In this example, it is assumed that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 70 times (the special game is not executed) within the period of 5 to 6 in the figure.

Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 70 times in the second limited frequency state, the second limited frequency state ends and the process shifts to the first limited frequency state.

Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the special game of 8R is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol “4B”. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to non-probability (non-probability variable game state), and the variable time is switched to non-time reduction (non-time shortened game state).

Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "4B" is completed, the game shifts to the non-probability variable game state and the time shortened game state, and the 0th limited frequency is set. (Hereinafter, in this example, the time-reduced gaming state and the 0th limited frequency state will continue for a maximum of 50 fluctuations).

With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, after the end of the special game related to the specific jackpot symbol (“7B” in this example), the main game symbol is used for a predetermined period. (In this example, the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation and the small hit fluctuation) tends to be short (for example, the second limited frequency state). As a result, the fluctuation efficiency on the second main game side is increased, so that the interval at which small hits (and small hit games) occur can be shortened, and even during the same probability fluctuation / time shortening gaming state, the player It is possible to create a new playability that there is an advantageous state (or a state that seems to be advantageous to the player).

In the present embodiment, the state in which the second limited frequency is set is configured to end with 70 fluctuations, but is not limited to this, and is configured to continue until the next big hit is won. May be good.

Although not particularly shown in this example, the effect mode (type of effect system such as background effect or advance notice effect) may be different depending on the set limited frequency type. As such a configuration, for example, when the second limited frequency is set (after the end of the special game that shifts to the second limited frequency), the staging mode is the staging mode A (for example, displaying a background image at night). ), And when the 1st limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency is set (after the end of the special game that shifts to the 1st limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency), the effect mode is the effect mode B (for example, in the evening). (Displays the background image of). Further, in the case of such a configuration, in a part of the symbol change scheduled to be a big hit during the stay in the effect mode A, the effect of shifting from the effect mode A to the effect mode B during the symbol change (night background image). The effect of changing from to the background image in the evening) may be executed. Further, in such a configuration, when the symbol is scheduled to be a big hit during the stay in the effect mode A and the frequency is to be changed to the second limited frequency again after the special game related to the big hit is completed. It may be configured to increase the possibility of maintaining the stay in the effect mode A. In other words, when an effect of transitioning from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is executed, this configuration changes to the first limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency after the end of the special game related to the symbol change. Since the possibility of transition increases and the situation may be disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game depending on whether or not such an effect is executed. That is, if such a transition to the production mode is not performed for the transition from the production mode B to the production mode A, when staying in the production mode B {(* without the mode transition, from the beginning (after the latest special game is completed) From) When a big hit occurs in the production mode B}, it is relatively second limited than when a big hit occurs in the production mode B with mode transition. Expectations for shifting to frequency will increase. In addition, in this configuration, it is suggested that the shift to the staging mode B is performed while staying in the staging mode A as a staging that shifts from the staging mode A to the staging mode B. Such an effect may be executed, and then a specific reach effect may be executed, or an effect similar to the specific reach effect may be generated during the stay in the effect mode B.

Although not particularly shown in this example, the total number of game balls entered into the large winning opening C10 during the small hit game is displayed or the number of balls is entered regardless of which limited frequency type is set. The count display may be configured to be displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, the total number of prize balls won during the period when the second limited frequency is set (especially during the loop period of the second limited frequency → special game → second limited frequency → ...) (small hit, The total number of prize balls such as big hits) may be displayed on the effect display device SG. Further, in such a configuration, the total number of winning prize balls displayed on the effect display device SG when the second limited frequency state ends (or when the effect mode A shifts to the effect mode B). Is temporarily stored, and at the timing when the effect mode shifts from the effect mode A to the effect mode B in the next second limited frequency state, the total number of winning prize balls displayed at the timing and the temporary storage are performed. The sum of the total number of winning prize balls may be displayed on the staging display device SG. Further, while the total number of prize balls won by the small hit is additionally displayed on the total number of prize balls displayed on the effect display device SG in the second limited frequency state, the 0th limited frequency state and the first In the limited frequency state, it is desirable to configure so that the number of prize balls won by the small hit is not displayed (in order to make it appear that the ball ejection speed is improved by the number of prize balls won by the small hit in the second limited frequency state). (The purpose of trying to differentiate).

Although not particularly shown in this example, a game state (particularly, a time-reduced game state / limited frequency) that shifts after the end of the special game related to the same big hit symbol depending on the game state at the time of the big hit that triggered the special game. It may be configured so that the state) and its duration are different. For example, in this example, if a jackpot related to the "7B" symbol is obtained by holding the remaining second main game side after the time shortening game is completed, the second limited frequency is set after the special game related to the jackpot is completed. It may be configured not to be set (for example, the first limited frequency is set).

Further, in this example, as an opportunity to shift to a state advantageous to the player (in this example, the second limited frequency state), only at the end of the special game related to one type of jackpot symbol is limited to this. Instead, for example, a plurality of jackpot symbols that shift to a state advantageous to the player after the end of the special game may be provided. Further, in that case, the period in which the player is in an advantageous state differs depending on which jackpot symbol is used for the jackpot (for example, 70 fluctuations after the jackpot A, 150 fluctuations after the jackpot B, and the player. It may be configured to be in an advantageous state). Further, when a plurality of small hit symbols and lost symbols are provided and a specific small hit symbol or lost symbol is won, it is possible to shift to a state advantageous to the player (meaning the second limited frequency in the present embodiment). It may be configured. In that case, as described above, the gaming state that shifts after the small hit game related to the same small hit symbol and the duration thereof may be different depending on the game state at the time of the small hit.

In this example, when either the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other symbol is forcibly stopped by the lost symbol. At this time, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c are subtracted, but the present invention is not limited to this. When is forcibly stopped, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c may not be subtracted.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, after a big hit with the "5A" symbol on the first main game side, in the second limited frequency state, when there is no limited frequency (loss fluctuation is 10 to 60 seconds, small hit fluctuation). The fluctuation time on the second main game side is shorter (the loss fluctuation is 0.5 seconds and the small hit fluctuation is 1 second), so that small hits occur frequently and are small. I explained by giving an example that a pseudo-bonus of winning a prize ball by a hit game can be created, but there are other specifications of a game machine that can be realized by a similar board configuration. For example, if the first main game side does not get a big hit with the "5A" symbol (for example, if it gets a big hit with the "7A" symbol), a limited frequency state different from the second limited frequency (for example, loss). By configuring the fluctuation to shift to 3 seconds and the small hit fluctuation to 1 to 10 seconds), the chance zone for shifting to the second limited frequency state, which is a high profit state (the above-mentioned second limited frequency). It is possible to create a gaming machine with different limited frequency states).

In addition, a limited frequency A, a limited frequency B, a limited frequency C, and a limited frequency D (variation efficiency on the second main game side: A> B> C> D) are provided, and a big hit or a small hit related to a specific small hit symbol is set. As an opportunity, the limited frequency type may be switched. In addition, in such a configuration, as the big hit (or a specific small hit) continues within the number of STs, the variable efficiency of the second main game side is higher (= the profitability of the player is higher), and the limited frequency type is selected. By configuring it so that it switches (that is, the rank down of the fluctuation efficiency does not occur), it is possible to create a new playability that the profitability of the player increases each time the villa is held (in that case, the upper limit of the number of STs). By reaching, the set limited frequency type will be reset).

Further, in this example, the variation efficiency of the second main game side is improved by shifting to a limited frequency state in which the variation mode in which the variation time of the second main game side is short is easily selected. , Not limited to this. For example, since the gaming machine according to this example is a parallel lottery type gaming machine, it is configured to shift to a limited frequency state in which a variation mode in which the variation time on the first main game side is long is easily selected. It may be configured to improve the relative fluctuation efficiency (the number of executions of the second main game variation with respect to the first main game variation) on the second main game side between the first main game and the second main game.

(Fifth Embodiment)
Here, the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine having a game property that allows both the acquisition of a prize ball by a special game and the acquisition of a prize ball by a small hit game. It is also possible to make the configuration specialized for winning prize balls by hitting. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 76 is a drawing showing a basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail.

First, in the fifth embodiment, the position and shape of the second main game starting port B10. In the fifth embodiment, the second main game start port B10 is provided directly below the first main game start port A10, and the game ball flowing down on the left side of the game area D30 is the first main game start port A10. It is configured so that the ball can enter any of the second main game starting port B10. Further, the second main game start port B10 has a horizontally long shape, so that the game ball can always enter the ball, and the game ball can easily enter the ball as compared with the first main game start port A10 (in this example, the ball can enter the ball easily. It is configured so that the game ball can easily enter because the opening for entering the game ball is large (note that the number of prize balls related to the entry into the second main game start opening B10 is one).

Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 6 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). With this configuration, the change of the second main game side can start even when the change of the first main game side, and the change of the first main game side also when the change of the second main game side. Can start (so-called parallel lottery).

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 82 in the fifth embodiment. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1407-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) fluctuation start condition is satisfied. The fluctuation start condition is not during the special game (or the condition device is operating), and the first main game symbol is not changing (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not changing). ), And there is a hold of the main game symbol, and it is a condition that the small hit game is not in progress. That is, since the parallel lottery can be executed, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol is changed when the process related to the first main game symbol is executed, but the first main game symbol is changing. If so, the fluctuation start condition related to the first main game side is not satisfied.

Next, in step 1407-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads out the random number on the main game side. Next, in step 1407-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the read main game side random number from the reserved information and shifts (pends digestion) the remaining reserved information. Next, in step 1407-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol winning / failing lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, in step 1407-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines a stop symbol related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the winning / failing lottery, and temporarily stores these in the RAM area. Next, in step 1407-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number). The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined main game symbol and game status information (a command to the sub side, a symbol variation display start instruction command, etc.). do. Next, in step 1407-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol to the first main game timer MP11t-C1 (second main game timer MP11t-) based on the variation mode. Set to C2) and start the timer. Next, in step 1407-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the display unit B21g), the variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1407-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) changing flag and shifts to step 1407-12. On the other hand, if No in step 1407-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1407-11 whether or not the first (second) changing flag is turned on. In step 1407-11, in the case of Yes, the process proceeds to step 1407-12.

Next, in step 1407-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on (the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped, the display is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to step 1407-16. On the other hand, if No in step 1407-12, in step 1407-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1407-14, in step 1407-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on (the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped with the stopped symbol as a lost symbol, the lost symbol is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to step 1407-16. ..

Next, in step 1407-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation ends to the sub-main control unit SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-18. Next, in step 1407-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-18, in step 1407-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, if No in step 1407-18, in step 1407-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-20, in step 1407-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, in step 1407-20, even if No, the process proceeds to step 1500 (fourth).

Next, in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned specific game end determination process. Next, in step 3350 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned limited frequency end determination process, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 84 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the fifth embodiment. First, as shown in the section (a) of the figure, in the non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state, the number of fired game balls and the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are reached. Due to the difference from the prize ball due to entering the ball, the player's ball will gradually decrease.

Next, as shown in the section of the figure (b), in the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the big winning opening C10 is opened shortly (opening for a short time when it is difficult to enter the game ball). Therefore, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and the number of balls held by the player does not change (or is small). Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "5A" is completed, the game becomes a probability fluctuation / time shortening game state, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 3C, in the probability fluctuation / time shortening gaming state (second limited frequency), a small hit occurs with a probability of 1004/1024 (= almost every fluctuation). By paying out the prize balls by entering the large winning opening C10 related to the small hit, the number of balls held by the player will increase. The probability fluctuation / time shortening gaming state (second limited frequency) of the (c) is an ST (probability fluctuation gaming state with a limited number of times) up to a maximum of 200 fluctuations, and is a gaming state with high profitability for the player. be.

Next, as shown in the section of the figure (d), in the special game related to the big hit symbol "5B", the big winning opening C10 is opened shortly (opening for a short time when it is difficult to enter the game ball). Therefore, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and the number of balls held by the player does not change (or is small). Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "5B" is completed, the game becomes a probability fluctuation / time shortening game state, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type. Further, since the upper limit number of times of the probability fluctuation gaming state is also reset, the high profit state of up to 200 fluctuations is started again.

Next, since the section of the figure (e) is the same as the game playability of the figure (e), the description is omitted. Since the jackpot symbol on the second main game side has only "5B" that resets the upper limit of the probability fluctuation game state, the upper limit of the number of probability fluctuations (200 fluctuations in this example) is reached (or). When the first main game side wins the "7A" symbol), the probability fluctuation / time reduction game state is terminated.

Next, FIG. 85 is a timing chart relating to the transition of the gaming state in the fifth embodiment. In the upper part of the figure, a case where a big hit is made with the “5A” symbol in a non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state will be described as an example. In the games before 1 in the figure, the fluctuation time on the second main game side tends to be long, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed.

First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the 2R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol “5A”. In this example, in the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the big winning opening C10 is short-opened, so that it is difficult to obtain the winning ball by entering the big winning opening C10.

Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "5A" is completed, the game shifts to a probability fluctuation game state (so-called ST) with a limited number of times up to 200 fluctuations, and again. , The second limited frequency is set.

Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the small hit game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed by the small hit symbol "BK" (probability fluctuation during the small hit game). The game state and the time reduction game state are not switched). During the second limited frequency (3-4 and 5-6 in the figure), the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol tends to be short, and the second main game side has a high probability of making a small hit. Small hit games will occur continuously.

Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the 2R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol “5B”. In this example, in the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the big winning opening C10 is short-opened, so that it is difficult to obtain the winning ball by entering the big winning opening C10. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to the non-probability change (non-probability variable game state).

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "5B" is completed, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state (so-called ST) of up to 200 fluctuations again, and also. The second limited frequency is set.

Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the probability fluctuation game state and the second limited frequency state are terminated when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 200 times within the period of 5 to 6 in the figure. .. It should be noted that, in the games after 6 in the figure, as in the games before 1 in the figure, the fluctuation time on the second main game side tends to be long, and the games on the first main game side are mainly executed. Become.

Next, with reference to the lower part of the figure, a case of a big hit with the “7A” symbol in the non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state will be described as an example. First, at the timing of FIG. A, the special game of 8R is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol “7A”.

Next, at the timing b in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "7A" is completed, the game shifts to a probability fluctuation game state (so-called ST) with a limited number of times up to 200 fluctuations. However, since the transition to the second limited frequency state does not occur, the fluctuation on the second main game side tends to be long even after that, and the game is mainly executed on the first main game side.

By changing as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment has a first main game start port A10 that can always enter the ball and a ball that can always enter the ball (more than the first main game start port A10). It has a second main game start port B10 (easy), and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be changed at the same time. Further, when the frequency is not limited to the second, the fluctuation time on the second main game side tends to be long, and the game is mainly executed on the first main game side. Further, in the second main game, it is configured to be a small hit with a high probability (in this example, a probability of 1004/1024). Here, when a big hit is achieved with a specific big hit symbol (in this example, "5A" and "5B"), a special game related to the big hit (in this example, a special game in which the big winning opening C10 is opened for a short time). After the end of the special game (which is a special game in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter), the game shifts to the second limited frequency state (and the probability variation game state) in which the fluctuation time on the second main game side tends to be short. After that, the second limited frequency state ends (in this example, the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 200 times in a row with a symbol other than the jackpot, or the jackpot is hit with the "7A" symbol. Until the end of the game), small hits occur continuously, and a new game property is created in which a prize ball is acquired by entering a game ball into the large winning opening A10 opened by the small hit. Can be done. In addition, since it is always easy to enter the second main game start port B10, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d (so-called electric chew) that supports entry into the second main game start port B10 is used. There is no need to provide it. As a result, the number of parts and the development cost can be reduced.

In this example, when either the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other symbol is forcibly stopped by the lost symbol. At this time, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter 53c are subtracted, but the present invention is not limited to this. When is forcibly stopped, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter 53c may not be subtracted.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, after a big hit with the "5A" symbol on the first main game side, in the second limited frequency state, when there is no limited frequency (loss fluctuation is 10 to 60 seconds, small hit fluctuation). The fluctuation time on the second main game side is shorter (the loss fluctuation is 0.5 seconds and the small hit fluctuation is 1 second), so that small hits occur frequently and are small. I explained by giving an example that a pseudo-bonus of winning a prize ball by a hit game can be created, but there are other specifications of a game machine that can be realized by a similar board configuration. For example, if the first main game side does not get a big hit with the "5A" symbol (for example, if it gets a big hit with the "7A" symbol), a limited frequency state different from the second limited frequency (for example, loss). By configuring the fluctuation to shift to 3 seconds and the small hit fluctuation to 1 to 10 seconds), the chance zone for shifting to the second limited frequency state, which is a high profit state (the above-mentioned second limited frequency). It is possible to create a gaming machine with different limited frequency states).

In addition, a limited frequency A, a limited frequency B, a limited frequency C, and a limited frequency D (variation efficiency on the second main game side: A> B> C> D) are provided, and a big hit or a small hit related to a specific small hit symbol is set. As an opportunity, the limited frequency type may be switched. In addition, in such a configuration, as the big hit (or a specific small hit) continues within the number of STs, the variable efficiency of the second main game side is higher (= the profitability of the player is higher), and the limited frequency type is selected. By configuring it so that it switches (that is, the rank down of the fluctuation efficiency does not occur), it is possible to create a new playability that the profitability of the player increases each time the villa is held (in that case, the upper limit of the number of STs). By reaching, the set limited frequency type will be reset).

Further, in this example, the variation efficiency of the second main game side is improved by shifting to a limited frequency state in which the variation mode in which the variation time of the second main game side is short is easily selected. , Not limited to this. For example, since the gaming machine according to this example is a parallel lottery type gaming machine, it is configured to shift to a limited frequency state in which a variation mode in which the variation time on the first main game side is long is easily selected. It may be configured to improve the relative fluctuation efficiency (the number of executions of the second main game variation with respect to the first main game variation) on the second main game side between the first main game and the second main game.

(Sixth Embodiment)
The configuration as described in the above embodiment is a game that can acquire balls by continuously generating small hit games, but using such an idea, a novelty different from the above-mentioned game. It is possible to create more playability. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as the sixth embodiment, and the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below. Further, since the sixth embodiment is also a modification based on the fifth embodiment, it should be added that any of the configurations shown in the fifth embodiment can be applied in the sixth embodiment. ..

Next, FIG. 86 is a drawing showing a basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail.

First, in the sixth embodiment, in the second big winning opening C20, the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) becomes a small hit symbol (the type of the symbol will be described later). It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the out opening D36 and on the upper right of the first large winning opening C10, which is opened when the player stops. As a specific configuration, the second major winning opening C20 includes a second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second major winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second major winning opening). The mouth solenoid C24) is provided. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second major winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second major winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second major winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second major winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easily won. It is made variable (the second prize-winning opening solenoid C24 is excited to make it variable). In the sixth embodiment, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d is a flat plate-shaped member like the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d, but the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d is variable. Unlike the embodiment, the embodiment is changed in the direction perpendicular to the game board (game area D30). That is, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d is substantially completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter, may be referred to as a retracted state) and is transparent from the game board (game area D30). It takes a state of protruding toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advanced state) until it is close to the board D16. Then, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d protrudes from the game board (game area D30), so that the box-shaped member C20-1 (in this box-shaped member) capable of receiving the game ball flowing down the game area D30. The box-shaped member C20-plays a role as a lid (the game ball that has entered enters into the second special winning opening C20), that is, when the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d takes a retracted state. While the game ball can enter 1 (by extension, inside the 2nd big winning opening C20), if the 2nd big winning opening electric accessory C21d takes an advanced state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extended). It is configured so that the game ball cannot enter (inside the second large winning opening C20) (this box-shaped member is in a substantially sealed state).

The specific area C22 described above in the sixth embodiment is provided in the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening C10 will be opened in the distribution game execution round in the special game. , The second big winning opening C20 will be opened during the normal round in the special game (the round other than the distribution game execution round in the special game) and the small hit game.

Regarding the game content developed on the game board, first, the game ball launched toward the game area D30 is a flow-down route formed on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) (hereinafter, left-handed). There is a large 2 to either flow down (sometimes called a route) or flow down a flow-down route (hereinafter sometimes called a right-handed route) formed on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). Divided. Here, the game ball that has flowed down the left-handed route has an opportunity to enter the left first main game start opening A10-1 or the first large winning opening C10, while the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route. Can get an opportunity to enter the auxiliary game start opening H10, the second big winning opening C20, the right first main game starting opening A10-2, the second main game starting opening B10, and the first big winning opening C10. Further, in the sixth embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to be easier to enter the first large winning opening C10 than the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route (“entry ball”. "Easy to enter" and "Difficult to enter" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched on the right-handed route and the left-handed route, respectively).

Also, on the left-handed route (although not shown), a game ball may or may not be guided toward the first main game start port A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. On the right-handed route (although not shown), the number of game nails and windmills is smaller than that of the left-handed route, and the game ball has a substantially uniform flow mode. take.

More specifically, regarding the right-handed route, first, a game ball launched aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the firing intensity of the game ball by the launcher is maximum, also called right-handed) , Flying in the game area D30 along the outer rail D32, and colliding with the stopper member (member made of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), and falling due to its own weight. To start. Next, the dropped game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 directly under the ball with a high probability, and then the flow path width exceeds one game ball and is less than two game balls. The ball is collected at D50 (regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10). Next, the game ball flowing down along the rectifying passage D50 is slightly tilted to the left with respect to the horizontal direction after being discharged from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, and has a three-stage stance. 1. After rolling on each passage of the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3, it is discharged toward the out port D36.

Here, the first stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state, while the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3 are formed. , The game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed by being fixed in advance to the game board. That is, when the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the exit of the rectifying passage D50. The game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the first stage passage D51-1 → the game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2 → first The game ball released from the second-stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third-stage passage D51-3 → the game ball released from the third-stage passage D51-3 is released toward the out port D36. , And is configured to adopt a substantially uniform flow mode.

In this way, since the game balls that have flowed down the right-handed route take a substantially uniform flow mode, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at intervals of about 0.6 seconds), it is assisted. When the ball is stably entered into the game start opening H10 and the electric accessory C21d is in the open state (retracted state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and thus the second large winning opening) When the ball is stably entered (inside C20) and the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d is opened, the ball can be stably entered into the first large winning opening C10. It should be noted that the space until the game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3 can be in a retracted state and an advanced state. Object A11-2d is provided, and when the first main game start port electric accessory A11-2d is in the advanced state, the game ball can be guided toward the right first main game start port A10-2. It is configured in.

In such a configuration, the game ball discharged from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. If this happens, there is a risk that the second major winning opening electric accessory C21d will be damaged. Therefore, at least at the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, it is important to have a configuration for reducing the momentum of the game ball that has flowed down (substantially dropped) in the rectifying passage D50. In the sixth embodiment, as shown in the vicinity of the exit of the rectifying passage D50, the passage wall surface of the rectifying passage D50 has a shape protruding toward the inside of the rectifying passage D50, and the inside of the rectifying passage D50 is played by this shape. By falling the ball in a zigzag manner, it is configured to reduce the momentum of the game ball. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the same reasoning is provided, that the configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is also provided. The points will be described later.

Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutines of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 82 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the fifth embodiment is step 1410-3 (sixth), the purpose of which is to adjust the jackpot winning probability and the small winning winning probability at the time of executing the parallel lottery, as will be described later. When staying in a certain gaming state, the selection tendency related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol (in other words, the lottery table used when drawing the fluctuation time) is made uniform (staying in a certain gaming state). If so, the lottery table will not be changed). That is, in step 1410-2, after determining the stop symbol related to the main game symbol, step 1410-3 (
In the sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number) based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number). 2) The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, these are temporarily stored in the RAM area, and the process proceeds to step 1407-7. The limited frequency end determination process {step 3350 (fourth)}, which is the process related to the limited frequency of the fifth embodiment, has been deleted.

Next, FIG. 88 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing in the sixth embodiment. First, as a feature of the main game table 1 (win / fail lottery table), small hits are provided on both the first main game side and the second main game side, and the result of the win / fail lottery is a big hit. The probabilities are 5/1024 during non-probability variable games and 7/1024 during probabilistic variable games. Further, the probability of winning a small hit as a result of the winning / failing lottery on the first main game side is 17/1024, and the probability of becoming a small hit as a result of the winning / failing lottery on the second main game side is 1016/1024. In addition, the probability of losing as a result of the winning / failing lottery on the first main game side is 1002/1024 during the non-probability variable game and 1000/1024 during the probability variable game, and the winning / failing lottery on the second main game side The probability of losing the result is 3/1024 during the non-probability variable game and 1/1024 during the probabilistic variable game. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the result of the winning / failing lottery on the second main game side is configured to be a small hit. On the first main game side, in both the non-probability variable game state and the probabilistic variable game state, the ratio selected as a result of the winning / failing lottery is “loss ≧ small hit ≧ big hit”. On the other hand, on the second main game side, the ratio selected as a result of the winning / failing lottery in both the non-probability variable game state and the probabilistic variable game state is “small hit ≧ big hit ≧ loss”. On the first main game side, it suffices if the loss is most easily selected, and random numbers may be distributed so that “loss ≧ big hit ≧ small hit” (in particular, even if the small hit is not provided). good). Further, on the second main game side, it suffices if the small hit is most easily selected, and random numbers may be distributed so that “small hit ≧ loss ≧ big hit”.

Next, as a feature of the main game table 2 (table for determining the design), a big hit symbol (4A in this example) is provided on the first main game side so that the second big winning opening C20 is short-opened. On the other hand, the second main game side is configured not to be provided with a big hit symbol in which the second big winning opening C20 is short-opened. In addition, the jackpot symbol with the largest total number of prize balls in one jackpot is "7A / 7B" in which a special game of 16R is executed, and is configured so that a maximum of "2400 balls" is paid out (details). Will be described later).

Next, as a feature of the main game table 3 (table for determining the variation mode), on the second main game side, in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the latent probability change state accompanied by the so-called non-electric support state). Is designed to select only the shortest variation time (1 second in this example) regardless of the result of success or failure. With this configuration, in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (so-called latent probability change state accompanied by the non-electric support state), when right-handed is executed, small hits are continuously made at short intervals. It is configured to keep winning (the effects created by this configuration will be described later). In addition, in a gaming state (particularly, a non-probability variable gaming state) other than a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state (a latent probability variation state accompanied by a so-called non-electric support state), a relatively short-time fluctuation occurs at the time of a big hit. Only the time (5 seconds in this example) is selected, and only the relatively long fluctuation time (100 minutes or more in this example) is selected at the time of loss or small hit. It has become. In addition, the average fluctuation time at the time of the big hit of the second main game symbol in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state) and the normal gaming state (non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state). The average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit is "the average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit in the normal game state> the average fluctuation of the second main game symbol in the normal game state at the time of the big hit". It is a relationship of "time". In addition, the average fluctuation time other than the big hit of the second main game symbol in the normal game state (non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state) and the probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state (so-called non-electric support state). The average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in the latent probability variation state with There is a relationship of "2 average fluctuation time of the main game symbol". Further, after the timing at which the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (so-called latent probability change state accompanied by the non-electric support state) ends, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol becomes extremely long. At that timing, there is a high possibility that the second main game hold remains, and there is a concern that the progress of the game will be hindered when the game is advanced by left-handed after the timing. Therefore, in order to forcibly stop the remaining hold due to loss (to digest the remaining hold as loss), a small hit on the first main game side appears at an appropriate frequency (17/1024 in this example). (Note that the fluctuation time in that case is 3 seconds). Specifically, during the change of the second main game symbol (particularly, the symbol related to the small hit symbol is changing), the symbol change related to the small hit symbol on the first main game side ends, and the first main game side By starting the small hit game of, the change of the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped at the lost symbol, so that the change of the second main game symbol can be terminated and the second main game can be terminated. It is possible to prevent the small hit game on the side from being executed. In addition, in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the change of the first main game symbol during the change is forcibly stopped by the lost symbol due to the start of the small hit game on the second main game side. In the fourth embodiment, the probability-variable game state and non-probability-variable game state and non-probability-variable game state due to the fluctuation of the main game symbol a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) in the jackpot or probability-variable game state and non-time reduction game state on the second main game side. Since the game is such that the time-reduced game state can be terminated, all the stop symbols related to the change on the first main game side in the probability-variable game state and the non-time-reduced game state are configured to be lost symbols. .. As described above, the difference in the average value of the fluctuation times that may differ depending on the gaming state is configured so that the difference in the fluctuation time on the second main game side is larger than the difference in the fluctuation time on the first main game side. ..

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the other main game side is changing the symbol at the timing when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped, the symbol change of the other main game side is forced by the lost symbol. It is configured to stop, but it is not limited to this, and when the change of the other main game symbol is started during the change related to a certain big hit symbol or small hit symbol, the change is made at the change start timing. The winning / failing lottery result of the other main game symbol may be forcibly converted into a loss, and the fluctuation of the other main game symbol may be stopped at the fluctuation stop timing of a certain big hit symbol or small hit symbol.

It should be noted that there is no problem even if the configuration of the main game table 3 (table for determining the variation mode) in the sixth embodiment is changed. , On the first main game side, it is possible to shift to the limited frequency state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. (2) When the game state is not a probability fluctuation game state and a non-time reduction game state, the first main game symbol When there are many types of variation modes related to the side (for example, 100 types), and (3) a gaming state that is not a probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, the average value of the fluctuation time related to the first main game side is Medium time (shorter than the long time on the second main game side, longer time than the short time on the second main game side, for example, 30 seconds), (4) Probabilistic variable gaming state and non-time. In the case of a gaming state that is not a shortened gaming state, the second main game side does not shift to the limited frequency state (even if the first main game side is in the limited frequency state), (5) the probability fluctuation gaming state and In the case of a gaming state that is not a non-time-reduced gaming state, there are few types of variation modes related to the second main game symbol side (for example, one type), (6) a game that is not a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-reducing gaming state. In the case of the state, the average value of the fluctuation time related to the second main game symbol side is a long time (for example, 100 minutes). On the game side, there are few types of variation modes related to the first main game symbol side (probability variable game state and non-probability variable game state and non-probability variable game state) when the game side does not shift to the limited frequency state. The number is larger than the types of variation modes related to the second main game symbol side in the game state that is not the time reduction game state, for example, 5 types), (9) Probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state. When the average value of the fluctuation time related to the first main game symbol side is a short time (for example, 3 seconds), (10) the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the second main game On the side, in the case of (11) probability-variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, which does not shift to the limited frequency state, there are few types of variation modes related to the second main game symbol side (probability-variable gaming state and non-time). The number is larger than the types of variation modes related to the second main game symbol side in the game state that is not the shortened game state, for example, 5 types), (12) in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state. In some cases, the average value of the fluctuation time related to the second main game symbol side is short (for example). For example, it may be configured as 3 seconds) {may satisfy all the configurations of (1) to (12) at the same time, or may be appropriately combined}. Further, all of the above configurations (1) to (12) may be configured to be applied only at the time of loss. Further, in the case of the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the first main game side may be configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and is configured as such. Therefore, when a parallel lottery can be executed and a right-handed hit is executed in a probability-variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state, either the first main game start port or the second main game start port is started. In the case of a configuration that allows the player to enter the ball, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol when shifting to the limited frequency state, until the first main game side wins a big hit. The average time can be lengthened, that is, the time during which small hits on the second main game side are continuous can be lengthened. Further, as the predetermined condition that is the transition condition to the above-mentioned limited frequency state, for example, the cumulative number of symbol fluctuations after the stop of a specific symbol such as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, or the end of the big hit or the small hit is set to the predetermined number of times. Arrival, etc. The big hit symbol and the small hit symbol according to the predetermined condition may be all the big hit symbols and / or all the small hit symbols, or may be a specific big hit symbol and / or a specific small hit symbol.

Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 36 in the sixth embodiment. In the figure, the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail. The differences from the second embodiment are steps 1854 (sixth) to 1858 (sixth), steps 1864 (sixth), steps 1888 (sixth) and 1890 (sixth), that is, in step 1852. When the distribution game execution flag is off (that is, at the start of the round), in step 1854 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M has stopped the main game symbol as a long open symbol (third). 1 It is a big hit symbol in which the big winning opening C10 is long open, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854 (sixth), in step 1856 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the long opening pattern of the first large winning opening C10 having the specific area C22 (for example, for 30 seconds). To make it easier to win a prize in the specific area C22), the process proceeds to step 1860. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1854 (sixth), in step 1858 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the short opening pattern of the first large winning opening C10 having the specific area C22 (for example,). It is open for 0.01 seconds, making it difficult to win a prize in the specific area C22), and the process proceeds to step 1860.

Further, after turning on the distribution game executing flag in step 1862, in step 1864 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first large winning opening C10 in the set opening pattern, and steps are taken. Move to 1888 (6th). It should be noted that even if the distribution game executing flag is turned on in step 1852, the process proceeds to step 1888 (sixth). Next, in step 1888 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) has been won in the first large winning opening C10. In the case of Yes in step 1888 (sixth), in step 1890 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first winning opening C10 and proceeds to step 1872. If No in step 1888 (6th), the process proceeds to step 1868, and if Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1890 (6th). Further, in the second embodiment, the large prize opening opened in the distribution game execution round is the second large prize opening C20, but in the sixth embodiment, the large prize opening is opened in the distribution game execution round. The mouth is the first big prize opening C10.

Here, the chart in the upper part of the figure is the average number of prize balls for each jackpot in the sixth embodiment. As shown in the chart, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot symbol having the largest total number of prize balls in one jackpot is "7A / 7B", and the maximum is "15 balls x 10 balls x 16R". It is configured so that "2400 balls" are paid out (details of the action created by this configuration will be described later). In the sixth embodiment, the distribution game execution round is "3R, 5R" in all the jackpot symbols.

Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (sixth) of FIG. 17 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1680-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1680-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) to the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c in step 1680-2. Next, in step 1680-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1680-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1680-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol related to the completed special game is a probability change / time saving jackpot symbol (7A / 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1680-5, in step 1680-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times A (200 times in this example), and steps 1680-9. Move to.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680-1, in step 1680-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol related to the completed special game is the time-saving jackpot symbol (4A in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1680-7, in step 1680-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c to the predetermined number B (50 times in this example), and steps 1680-9. Move to.

Next, in step 1680-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and shifts to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}. Even if No in step 1680-5 or step 1680-7, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the state shifts to the probability fluctuation game state, the change of the main game symbol a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game related to the transition (stop of the jackpot symbol related to the special game). It is configured so that the probability fluctuation gaming state ends (shifts to the normal gaming state) (so-called ST). In addition, a gaming machine (so-called ball-probability type gaming) that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of a special game due to the entry of a gaming ball into a specific area C22 provided in the first major winning opening C10. Machine). Further, after the end of the special game when the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to "5A / 5B" (and the end of the special game when the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to "4A"). It is configured to be in a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-shortening gaming state (a latent probability change state accompanied by a so-called non-electric support state) (No in step 1799-5). Is a part of the case where the stop symbol is "5A / 5B" or the stop symbol is "4A"). In the sixth embodiment, when the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to the time-saving jackpot symbol (4A) (when the main game probability change transition reservation flag is turned on), the probability It is configured to shift to the variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, but the probability variable gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the non-probability variable gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (step 1799- for the time reduction counter MP52c). It is desirable to set the predetermined number of times B of 8), and it may be configured to shift to the normal gaming state (non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state).

Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (sixth) of FIG. 72 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1745-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1745-1, in step 1745-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1745-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1745-4, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the current stop symbol is the first main game small hit symbol (small hit symbol on the first main game side, AK in this example). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1745-4, in step 1745-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M is set in the timer MP41t for the small hit game when the first opening time (the small hit game related to the first main game is executed). It is a time, and in this example, 0.01 second) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1745-8. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1745-4, in other words, when the current stop symbol is the second main game small hit symbol (small hit symbol on the second main game side, BK in this example), the step. In 1745-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set in the timer MP41t for the small hit game during the second opening time (the time set when the small hit game related to the second main game is executed. In this example, 1. 7 seconds) is set. Next, in step 1745-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a small hit start command (command to the sub side) indicating that the small hit game has started (sub by the control command transmission process in step 1999). It is transmitted to the main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1745-8. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the small hit start command is configured to be set only when the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (BK in this example) on the second main game side is executed. 1 It is not set when the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the main game side is executed. Therefore, when the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side is stopped, it is difficult for the player to detect the small hit winning even if the player visually recognizes the effect, and it is difficult to acquire the game ball by the small hit. (Because you are not executing right-handed). The small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side is a long-time variation (100) of the second main game symbol in the normal game state (non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state). The role of forcibly stopping (variations of seconds or more) with a lost symbol {For example, a probability fluctuation game state and a non-time shortening game state (a latent probability change state accompanied by a so-called non-electric support state) triggered by the cumulative number of fluctuations of the main game symbol It plays a role of forcibly stopping the symbol change related to the holding of the remaining second main game side when the game shifts from the normal game state (non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state). Further, at the time of executing the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side, and executing the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (BK in this example) on the second main game side. In any case of the time, the small hit start command may be configured to be set, and in such a configuration, the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side is involved. It is desirable that the small hit start command set at the time of executing the hit game and the small hit start command set at the time of executing the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (BK in this example) on the second main game side are different commands. For example, when the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side is executed, it is difficult for the player to see (for example, the display area is small) on the effect display device SG. A hitting instruction display is displayed (may be without sound), and when the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (BK in this example) on the second main game side is executed, the player can visually recognize it on the effect display device SG. It may be configured to display a right-handed instruction display (which may be notified by voice) that is easy to use (for example, the display area is large).

Next, in step 1745-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20, starts the small hit game timer MP41t, and proceeds to step 1747-1. If No in step 1745-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1745-9 whether or not the small hit execution flag is turned on. Step 1745-9
In the case of Yes, the process proceeds to step 1747-1.

Next, in step 1747-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of game balls (10 in this example) have been won in the second large winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 1747-1, the process proceeds to step 1747-3, and in the case of No, in step 1747-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached the predetermined time for the small hit game timer MP41t. It is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed). In the case of Yes in step 1747-2, the process proceeds to step 1747-3. Next, in step 1747-3, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, whether or not the stop symbol is the second main game small hit symbol (small hit symbol on the second main game side, BK in this example). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1747-3, in step 1747-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a small hit end command (command to the sub side) indicating that the small hit game is completed (control in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the command transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1747-5. On the other hand, if No in step 1747-3, in other words, even if the stop symbol is the first main game small hit symbol (the small hit symbol on the first main game side, in this example, AK). It shifts to 1747-5 (similar to the above-mentioned small hit start command, the small hit end command is also set only during the small hit game related to the second main game small hit symbol). In the sixth embodiment, the large winning opening opened in the small hit game is the second large winning opening C20. Next, in step 1747-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1747-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the small hit game timer MP41t and resets (zero clears) it. Next, in step 1747-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1745-9 or step 1747-2, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Here, the chart in the upper part of the figure is the average number of prize balls for each small hit symbol in the sixth embodiment. As shown in the chart, in the sixth embodiment, the average total number of prize balls in one small hit (that is, the expected value of the number of game balls that the player can obtain by one small hit) is ". In the case of "AK", it is relatively small, "1.5 balls", while in the case of "BK", it is relatively large, "15 balls", that is, the small amount related to "AK". In the hit, in many cases, no game ball is configured to enter the second big winning opening C20, while in the small hit related to "BK", in many cases, the second big winning opening is made. It is configured so that one or more game balls enter the C20.

Next, FIG. 92 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the sixth embodiment. First, as shown in the section of FIG. 3A, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), the number of game balls fired and the left first main game starting port A10-1 The number of balls held by the player will gradually decrease due to the difference from the prize ball due to the entry into the ball.

Next, as shown in the section of the figure (b), during the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the player plays with a right-handed hit and the prize ball by entering the first big prize opening C10 is played. By paying out, the player's ball will increase. After that, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "5A" is completed, the game becomes a probability fluctuation game state and a non-time shortening game state (a latent probability change state accompanied by a so-called non-electric support state). If the second main game symbol is being displayed in a variable manner when the jackpot symbol "5A" is stopped and displayed (because a so-called parallel lottery is adopted, such an event may occur). Even if the second main game symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol or a big hit symbol, the second main game symbol will be forcibly stopped by a lost symbol.

Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 3C, in the winning / failing lottery of the second main game side in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the latent probability change state accompanied by the so-called non-electric support state). Since the small hit is won with a probability of 1016/1024 (= almost every fluctuation), and the symbol change related to the small hit winning is short-time (1 second in this example) in the latent probability change state, this is the case. By paying out the prize balls by entering the second large winning opening C20 related to the small hit, the number of balls held by the player will increase. The probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (so-called latent probability variation state accompanied by the non-electric support state) of (c) is ST (probability variation gaming state with a limited number of times) up to a maximum of 200 fluctuations. Further, in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (so-called latent probability change state accompanied by the non-electric support state) of (c), the probability of becoming a big hit is 7/1024 per fluctuation, so that the average 146 fluctuations continue. However, since the small hit is won 145 times on average due to the 146 symbol fluctuations, the total of the small hits related to the second main game during the stay in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state of (c). The average number of prize balls is 2175.

Next, as shown in the section of the figure (d), during the special game related to the big hit symbol "7B", the prize ball by entering the second big prize opening C20, etc. is paid out. The number of balls held by the player will increase. Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, the game becomes a probability-variable game state and a time-shortened game state (a probable change state accompanied by a so-called electric support state). As described above, the "7B" is a jackpot symbol that can pay out the most game balls in the fourth embodiment, and the prize ball of "2400 balls" is paid out at the jackpot related to the "7B". Become.

Here, the above-mentioned section from (c) to (d) includes the jackpot related to the "7B" symbol in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (so-called latent probability variation state accompanied by the non-electric support state). It is a series of flows in which a game ball can be acquired, and in the series of flows, the section (c), that is, the section in which a prize ball by a small hit is acquired (or the section in which a prize ball excluding a big hit is acquired). The total average number of prize balls in) is "2145 balls", while the section (d), that is, the jackpot that is the maximum number of prize balls (the jackpot on the first main game side and the second main game side). The total average number of prize balls in the section where the prize balls are acquired by the jackpot, which is the maximum number of prize balls among all the jackpots, is "2400 balls", and "total number of prize balls by jackpot> It is composed of "total number of prize balls by small hit". In addition, the composition is "total number of prize balls by big hit> total number of prize balls excluding big hit".

Next, as shown in the section (e) of the same figure, in the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state (probability change state accompanied by the so-called electric support state), the player plays with a right-handed game and the right second. 1 The game ball is fired toward the main game start port A10-2, and the game is mainly executed on the first main game side. In addition, the prize ball by entering the game ball into the right first main game start port A10-2 allows the game to proceed while maintaining the holding ball.

With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, in the case of a probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (a latent probability change state accompanied by a so-called non-electric support state), the first 2 The fluctuation time related to the main game symbol is set to a relatively short time (1 second in this example), and the game is advanced by firing a game ball toward the second main game start port B10 by hitting right. On the other hand, in the case of the probability fluctuating gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (probability changing state accompanied by the so-called electric support state), the fluctuating time related to the second main game symbol is relatively long (100 in this example). It is configured so that the game progresses by firing a game ball toward the right first main game start port A10-2 by hitting right (for a long time of one minute or more). In addition, in the case of a probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (a latent probability variation state accompanied by a so-called non-electric support state), a small hit related to a ball entering the second main game starting port B10 is continuously won. As a result, while increasing the number of game balls, the game is expected to win a big hit, while in the case of a probability-variable game state and a time-shortened game state (a probable change state accompanied by a so-called electric support state), the first main game start port. With the prize ball of the electric accessory A11-2d, etc., it becomes a game that is expected to win a big hit while maintaining the ball, and even when the game is advanced by right-handed, multiple game properties that differ depending on the game state are realized. You will be able to do it.

(Example 1 of change from the sixth embodiment)
In the sixth embodiment, the configuration in which the number of balls held can be increased by continuously winning small hits has been described in detail, but such a playable gaming machine is only the configuration of the sixth embodiment. Not limited to. Therefore, a configuration in which the number of balls held is increased by a series of small hits different from that of the sixth embodiment is referred to as change example 1 from the sixth embodiment, and the changes from the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment is such that the parallel lottery as illustrated in the sixth embodiment can be executed and does not have the V winning opening C27 and the specific area C22. It is supposed to be.

First, FIG. 93 is a drawing showing the basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine in the first modification of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, two starting ports, a first main game starting port A10 and a first main game starting port A10-2, are provided as the first main game starting port, and the first main game starting port is provided. The game start port A10 is configured so that a game ball flowing down on the left side of the game area D30 can easily enter, and a game ball flowing down on the right side of the game area D30 can easily enter. Further, the first main game start port A10-2, the second main game start port B10, and the auxiliary game start port H10 are provided on the right side of the game area D30, and a game ball flowing down on the right side of the game area D30 enters. It is easy to play, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is configured to be difficult to enter. The second main game start port B10 is not provided with an electric accessory, and the first main game start port A10-2 can easily enter the first main game start port A10-2. To the first main game start port electric accessory A11d and the first main game start port A10-2, which can be displaced between the open state and the closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball (displaceable based on the result of the auxiliary game). It has a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s-2 for detecting entry. Further, in the first large winning opening C10 and the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d, a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided and flows down the left side of the game area D30. It is configured so that the game ball to be played is difficult to be guided.

Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to step 1700 (sixth) of FIG. 72 in the first modification from the sixth embodiment. The change from the sixth embodiment is step 3800 (sixth variation 1), that is, after turning off the small hit execution flag in step 1747-7, the main control is performed in step 3800 (sixth variation 1). The CPUMC of the board M executes the small hit-related time saving end determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hit-related time saving end determination process in the first modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3802, in step 3804, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped small hit symbol is the first main game small hit symbol (AK in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3804, in step 3806, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 3808, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 3802 or step 3804, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). As described above, in the change example 1 from the sixth embodiment, the time-reduced game state ends when the small hit on the first main game side is won in the case of the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state. That is, it is configured to shift to a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-shortening gaming state. Further, as in the sixth embodiment, in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the fluctuation efficiency of the second main game symbol becomes extremely good (the fluctuation time becomes short), so that the second main game symbol is used. Frequent small hits on the game side will increase the number of balls held. The main game flow is as follows: (1) A left-handed strike is executed in a non-probability variable game state and a non-time shortened game state, and the game progresses by entering the first main game start port A10. 2) By winning the jackpot on the first main game side, the player shifts to the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot ends. , The game progresses by entering the first main game start port A10-2 (the ball also enters the second main game start port B10, but the fluctuation efficiency is extremely poor, so the second main game small hit (The number of balls held does not increase), (4) By winning the first main game small hit, the player shifts from the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state to the probability-variable game state and the non-time-reduced game state, and continues to hit right. The first main game start port electric accessory A11d is difficult to open, so that the ball does not enter the first main game start port A10-2, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second main game symbol is extremely good. As a result, the winning of the second main game small hit symbol will occur frequently.

With the above configuration, in the change example 1 from the sixth embodiment, the time shortening game state ends by winning the first main game small hit symbol (time reduction game state to non-time reduction game state). By configuring it so that it can be changed to (shift to), it is possible to continuously play a gaming state that is advantageous for two players, that is, a probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state, and a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-shortening gaming state. It is possible to make it a highly entertaining gaming machine that can be expected to get more balls.

In addition, as the configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the sixth embodiment, (1) the display of the decorative symbol related to the second main gaming symbol is not executed (in the case of the non-probability variable gaming state). (To prevent the player from performing a right-handed hit), (2) The opening time of the big winning opening in the big hit and the small hit related to the second main game side is made relatively short (non-probability variable gaming state). In this case, even if the player detects the winning of the big hit or the small hit on the second main game side and then starts executing the right-handed hit, the game ball does not enter the big winning opening), (3). It may be configured to provide a mechanism for slowing down the flow speed when the game ball flows down, such as around the rectifying passage D50 of the sixth embodiment.

(Example 2 of change from the sixth embodiment)
In the change example 1 from the sixth embodiment, the time-reduced game state can be changed to the non-time-reduced game state by executing the small-hit game related to the first main game small-hit symbol. The configuration in which the time-reduced gaming state can be terminated by a small hit is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration in which the time-reduced gaming state can be terminated by a small hit and a configuration different from the modification 1 from the sixth embodiment is referred to as a modification 2 from the sixth embodiment, and hereinafter, from the sixth embodiment. Only the changes from the first modification will be described in detail.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the second modification from the sixth embodiment can execute the parallel lottery as illustrated in the sixth embodiment, and the V winning opening C27 as exemplified in the third embodiment. It is configured to have.

First, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the small hit-related time saving end determination process in the second modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3810, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3810, in step 3812, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the V winning opening C27 during the small hit. In the case of Yes in step 3812, in step 3814, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a time-saving medium-small hit continuous counter (an increment counter, for measuring the number of consecutive winning small hits in the time-saving gaming state). Counter) Add 1 to the value. Next, in step 3816, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time-saving medium-small hit continuous counter is the time-saving end value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3816, in step 3818, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag. In addition, in the change example 2 from the sixth embodiment, even if the small hits that did not enter the V winning opening C27 are consecutive a predetermined number of times in the time shortening game state, the time saving medium small hit continuous counter value increases. Therefore, it will shift to the non-time reduction game state. Next, in step 3820, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag and shifts to step 3824. Even if No in step 3810 and step 3812, the process proceeds to step 3824. Next, in step 3824, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time-saving, medium-small hit continuous counter to zero, and proceeds to the next process (step 1997). Even if No in step 3816, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the sixth embodiment, the small hit symbol and the non-time reduction that shift to the time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit symbol In addition to providing a small hit symbol that shifts to the gaming state, in a situation where the time is shortened, the small hits that did not enter the V winning opening C27 are continuously performed a predetermined number of times to enter the non-time shortened gaming state. By configuring it so that it can be transferred, if the small hit symbol that will shift to the non-time reduction game state after the end of the special game that shifts by entering the V winning slot C27 stops, the V winning slot A game that exceeds the design value by allowing the game ball to enter the V winning opening C27 when the small hit symbol that shifts to the time shortening game state stops after the special game is completed, while the game ball is not allowed to enter the C27. It is possible to prevent the situation where the ball is acquired, and even though the player fires the game ball toward the second major winning opening during the special game in which it is easy to win the V winning opening C27. , Even if a situation occurs in which the V winning opening C27 cannot be won, if the ball is entered into the V winning opening C27 at the time of the next small hit game, it is a user-friendly gaming machine that does not have to shift to the non-time reduction game state. can do.

(Example 3 of change from the sixth embodiment)
In the second modification from the sixth embodiment to the sixth embodiment, the playability of the gaming machine having a small hit is illustrated, but the configuration of the gaming machine having a small hit is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine having a small hit different from the above-described configuration is referred to as change example 3 from the sixth embodiment, and the changes from the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 97 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the third modification from the sixth embodiment. Here, the changes from the sixth embodiment are step 1700 (sixth variation 3) and step 3150 (sixth variation 3). That is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 1700 (sixth variation 3), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later, and proceeds to step 1950 (third). do. Further, after executing the prize ball payout control process in step 1997, in step 3150 (sixth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process described later, and proceeds to step 1999.

Next, FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutines of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 82 in the third modification from the sixth embodiment. .. First, in step 1403-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1403-1, in step 1403-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads out the random number on the main game side. Next, in step 1403-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the read main game side random number from the reserved information and shifts the remaining reserved information (in this example, reserved digestion). Next, in step 1403-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game symbol is correct or not based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number) and the game state. Execute a lottery. Next, in step 1403-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). Determine the stop symbol related to the main game symbol. Next, in step 1403-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the result of the main game symbol winning / failing lottery, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number) and the main. The variation mode of the first (second) main game symbol is determined based on the stop symbol related to the game symbol. Next, in step 3650 (6th variation 3), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a variable fixed time determination process described later. Next, in step 1403-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area, and the current game. The command related to the status (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). ). Next, in step 1403-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1403-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the display unit B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area. Next, in step 1403-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag and shifts to step 1403-12. If No in step 1403-1, in step 1403-13, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1403-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M shifts to step 1403-12.

Next, in step 1403-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1403-12, in step 1403-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation is completed to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1403-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on the display unit B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1403-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag. Next, in step 1403-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the determined variable fixed time in the variable fixed time timer and starts. Next, in step 1403-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the variable fixing flag and shifts to step 1403-20. If No in step 1403-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1403-19 whether or not the variable fixing flag is on. If Yes in step 1403-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M shifts to step 1403-20.

Next, in step 1403-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variable fixed time timer value is 0. If Yes in step 1403-20, in step 1403-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the variable fixed flag. Next, in step 1403-22, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 1403-22, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a jackpot symbol stop command (command to the sub side) in step 1403-23. Next, in step 1403-24, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, if No in step 1403-22, in step 1403-25, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1403-25, in step 1403-26, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). In addition, even if No in 1403-25, the process proceeds to step 1500 (fourth).

Next, in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process, and proceeds to the next process (step 1550). On the other hand, even when No in step 1403-12 and step 1403-20, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 1403-19, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 3650 (sixth variation 3) of FIG. 98 in the modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is on. Next, in the case of Yes in step 3652, in step 3654, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the change is a symbol change related to the second main game. In the case of Yes in step 3654, in step 3656, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variation is a symbol variation related to a small hit. In the case of Yes in step 3656, in step 3658, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the fluctuation fixed time of the symbol variation for a long time (for example, 30 seconds), and the next process (process of step 1403-8). Move to. If No in step 3652, step 3654 or step 3656, in step 3660, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to be short (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the next The process proceeds to the process (process of step 1403-8). As described above, in the third modification from the sixth embodiment, the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol on the second main game side in the time shortened gaming state is the other variable fixed time (for example, the main non-small hit symbol). Fixed time of fluctuation of game symbol, time reduction Time value different from fixed time of fluctuation of small hit symbol on the 2nd main game side, fixed time of fluctuation of small hit symbol on the 1st main game side, etc.) It has become. Further, by configuring in this way, when the small hit on the second main game side is won in the time-shortened game state, the second main game hold occurs before the small hit related to the small hit symbol is started. It is structured so that you can secure the time to make it.

Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process in the third modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1703-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit end demo in-progress flag is off. If Yes in step 1703-1, in step 1703-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1703-2, in step 1703-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1703-3, in step 1703-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1703-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening related to the round. Next, in step 1703-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1703-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening and starts the timer MP41t for the small hit game. Next, in step 1703-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 (increment timer in this example), and proceeds to step 1703-11. On the other hand, if No in step 1703-3, in step 1703-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1703-10, the process proceeds to step 1703-11. Next, in step 1703-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there has been a prize in the second large winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 1703-11, in step 1703-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) of winnings has been made in the second large winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1703-12, the process proceeds to step 1703-14. On the other hand, if No in step 1703-11 or step 1703-12, in step 1703-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value for the small hit game has reached a predetermined time. If Yes in step 1703-13, the process proceeds to step 1703-14.

Next, in step 1703-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1703-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge waiting flag and shifts to step 1703-16. Even if No in step 1703-2, the process proceeds to step 1703-16.

Next, in step 1703-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge standby timer value is the discharge standby time end value (13 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 1703-16, in step 1703-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1703-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge waiting flag. Next, in step 1703-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1703-19, in step 1703-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M tells the small hit end demo timer the small hit end demo time A (which is shorter than the small hit end demo time B described later). In this example, 3 seconds) is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 1703-22. On the other hand, if No in step 1703-19, in step 1703-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M tells the small hit end demo timer the small hit end demo time B (longer than the above-mentioned small hit end demo time A). Yes, in this example, 5 seconds) is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 1703-22.

Next, in step 1703-22, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit end demo in progress flag and proceeds to step 1703-23. Even if No in step 1703-1, the process proceeds to step 1703-23. Next, in step 1703-23, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit end demo timer value is 0. If Yes in step 1703-23, in step 1703-24 the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit end demo in progress flag. Next, in step 1703-25, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets (zero clears) the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1703-26, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 1997). In addition, even if No in step 1703-10, step 1703-13, step 1703-16 or step 1703-23, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3150 (sixth variation 3) in FIG. 97. First, in step 3152, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3154, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and, based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, connects to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1999).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal board G according to the third modification from the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of the signal output). The external relay terminal board G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Terminal for outputting game status information for outputting information related to specific game status, special game status, etc., error information for outputting various error information detected by the open detection sensor when the door is open, etc. Output terminals, etc.} are provided. As will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout-related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, there are a plurality of jackpot output terminals that output a signal during a jackpot at the time of a jackpot (there are a plurality of terminals depending on the type of jackpot). ), The door open output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, the start port output terminal that outputs a signal when a prize is won in the start port, and the prize ball tank KT are short of balls. Game-related information that is important information for the game hall operator, such as an output terminal when the ball is out, which outputs a signal while the ball is out, and an output terminal for the number of times the special symbol is confirmed, which outputs a signal when the special symbol confirmation is stopped. It is an output terminal. That is, by setting the output terminal of the payout-related information as one output terminal, it is possible to prevent the output terminal of these important game-related information from being exhausted.

Further, in the third modification from the sixth embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. It is configured to send. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, to explain the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the sixth embodiment, first, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G. , And the external relay terminal board G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always conductive. Not that. That is, the electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being once replaced with a physical signal (a signal of binary logic whose switch state is on / off) by the unit, it is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is degaussed, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC do not conduct with each other. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, by detecting the conduction period, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G. With such a configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and the main control board M from the hall computer HC side can be secured. This is to prevent the goto act (so-called remote control goto) of illegally operating the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, a mechanism using a relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing a goto action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, with a pair of light emitting units. A photosensor having a light receiving unit also enables one-way communication (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by a light receiving unit connected to the hall computer HC. It should be added that the signal can be received by reading by the unit.

However, since the configuration is such that the physical signal (switch state is on / off) is temporarily replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are one of the external relay terminal boards G for the whole computer HC. It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input / output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for a special symbol fixed number of times). It is customary to configure so that only the information that "one change of the special symbol has been completed" can be transmitted).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the third modification from the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 of FIG. 102. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and it is supplemented that they can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, it is a signal of the symbol variation meter; a signal for outputting the number of symbol fluctuations related to the first main game and the second main game; changes from the first main game symbol temporary stop timing and the second main game symbol temporary stop timing; It is a signal that continues to output an on signal until the end of a fixed time. In addition, in the change example 3 from the sixth embodiment, it changes when the small hit symbol on the second main game side is won in the time shortened game state, that is, when the second main game small hit symbol is stopped. Since the fixed time is longer than in other cases, the output time of the signal related to the symbol variation is also relatively long.

Next, the signal of the big hit system; the signal that outputs that the big hit is in progress (for example, the condition device operation flag is on); is based on the entry into the V winning opening C26 triggered by the small hit. In the case of a big hit, the timing when the ball entering the V winning opening C26 is detected, and in the case of a big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol, the condition device operation flag is off → on timing (the timing of the big hit start). Until it finishes (condition device operation flag from on to off), it turns off after outputting an on signal. In addition, between the small hit won in the time shortened game state and the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state, the small hit won in the time shortened game state has a shorter small hit end demo time. Therefore, the time during which the external terminal signal is output during the small hit end demo time is shorter for the small hit won in the time-reduced gaming state than for the small hit won in the non-time-reduced gaming state. .. The same configuration can be applied to the small hit start demo time, that is, the small hit won in the time shortened game state and the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state are in the time shortened game state. The small hit that was won has a shorter small hit start demo time, and the time during which the external terminal signal related to the small hit start demo time is output during the small hit start demo time is in the non-time shortened gaming state. The small hit won in the time-reduced gaming state may be configured to be shorter than the winning small hit. Further, the same configuration can be applied to the external terminal signal indicating that the jackpot is in progress, that is, the jackpot won in the time-reduced gaming state and the jackpot won in the non-time-reduced gaming state are time-reduced games. The big hit won in the state may be configured to have a shorter output time of the external terminal signal indicating that the big hit is in the big hit than the big hit won in the non-time shortening gaming state. If the big hit is won in the time shortened game state, the game is in the non-time shortened game state during the big hit execution, and if the small hit is won in the time shortened game state, the small hit is being executed. It is in a time-reduced game state (the time-reduced game state is maintained). Further, an external terminal signal related to information indicating that the game is in the time-reduced game state may be configured to be output, and the external terminal signal can be started to be output in the time-reduced game state. It is configured so that the on signal can be continuously output over the "medium / small hit medium → time reduction game state". As described above, the time-reduced gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is activated, and the non-time-reduced gaming state indicates that the open time extension function is not activated. May be good.

Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process in the third modification from the sixth embodiment. The changes from the sixth embodiment are step 2204-1 (sixth variation 3), step 2204-2 (sixth variation 3) and step 2204-3 (sixth variation 3), that is, in step 2204. After turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2204-1 (6th variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (non-time shortened gaming state). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2204-1 (6th variation 3), in step 2204-2 (6th variation 3), in the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, is the symbol variation the symbol variation on the second main game side? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2204-2 (6th variation 3), in step 2204-3 (6th variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S hides the stop display and the variation display of the decorative symbol. The determination is made and the process proceeds to step 2208. If the result is No in step 2204-1 (6th variation 3) or 2204-2 (6th variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2206. As described above, in the change example 3 from the sixth embodiment, in the symbol variation on the second main game side in the non-time shortening gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden to change to the non-time shortening gaming state. It can be configured so that the player does not perform a right-handed strike. It should be noted that such a configuration can be applied to other embodiments, and is suitable when it is not desired to execute a right-handed hit in a non-time shortened gaming state or a non-probability variable gaming state.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 3 from the sixth embodiment, the gaming state, the result of success or failure related to the main game symbol, and whether the symbol changes on the first main game side or the second main It is configured so that the variable fixed time can be different depending on whether it is a symbol variation on the game side, etc., and the external terminal signal related to the variable fixed time can be output so that the signal can be appropriately output to the outside of the gaming machine. Will be possible.

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board applicable to this example will be described with reference to the external terminal transmission content determination table 2 of FIG. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and it is supplemented that they can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, the external output signal of signal number 3 can be applied to a gaming machine that can shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of a special game by entering a specific area C22 in the large winning opening. It is a signal of a big hit system; the second big winning opening (attacker) C20 provided with a specific area C22 which is a ball entry area for determining whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation gaming state is short-opened (for example, maximum opening time). Is 0.01 seconds) The distribution game execution round, which is a round, is being executed (the special electric accessory is operating), and the ball entry detection to the specific area C22 is enabled. Occasionally, the signal that outputs that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 is; It is a signal that continues to output an on signal for 1 second from the timing when the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the state of. If the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the distribution game execution round in which the second large winning opening C20 is long open, the external terminal signal is not output. That is, it is configured so that the presence / absence of output of the external terminal signal when the ball enters the specific region C22 differs between the long-open jackpot and the short-open jackpot. Further, it is preferable to configure the external terminal signal so that it is not output except for the first signal that satisfies the above output timing at the time of executing one special game.

Next, the external output signal of the signal number 3 can be applied to a gaming machine in which a big hit can be started after the small hit game is completed by entering the V winning opening C27 in the big winning opening. The signal of the additional external terminal system; the signal to output that the game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 during the small hit game in the non-time shortened gaming state; during the small hit game in the non-time shortened gaming state. From the timing when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 within the valid period of the V winning opening; 0.200 seconds on → 0.200 seconds off.

Next, FIG. 105 is an example of the configuration of the electric accessory opening time applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. In the figure, the case where the big hit symbol is stopped or the small hit symbol is stopped during the change of the auxiliary game symbol and the big hit or the small hit is started, and then the auxiliary game symbol is stopped during the execution of the big hit or the small hit. Illustrate.
(1) <When the jackpot symbol stops in the non-time reduction game state>
If the jackpot symbol is stopped in the non-time shortened gaming state during the change of the auxiliary game symbol, the non-time shortened gaming state is maintained even if the jackpot symbol is stopped, and the change is in progress during the execution of the jackpot. When the auxiliary game symbol stops at the hit symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively short opening (0.2 seconds opening → closing).
(2) <When the jackpot symbol stops in the time reduction game state>
When the jackpot symbol was stopped in the time-reduced gaming state during the change of the auxiliary game symbol, the game transitioned to the non-time-reduced gaming state due to the stop of the jackpot symbol, and the change was in progress during the execution of the jackpot. When the auxiliary game symbol stops at the hit symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively short opening (0.2 seconds opening → closing).
(3) <When the small hit symbol stops in the non-time reduction game state>
If the small hit symbol is stopped in the non-time shortened gaming state during the change of the auxiliary game symbol, the non-time shortened gaming state is maintained even if the small hit symbol is stopped, and the change is made during the execution of the small hit. When the auxiliary game symbol that was in the middle stops at the hit symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively short opening (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing).
(4) <When the small hit symbol stops in the time reduction game state>
If the small hit symbol is stopped in the time-reduced gaming state during the change of the auxiliary game symbol, the time-reduced gaming state is maintained even if the small hit symbol is stopped, and the change is in progress during the execution of the small hit. When the existing auxiliary game symbol stops at the hit symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively long opening (0.2 seconds opening → 0.8 closing → 4 seconds → closing).

Next, FIG. 106 is a configuration example in which a small hit is won in the final change of the time-reduced gaming state according to this example. For example, when the game shifts to the time-reduced gaming state of 100 times after the end of the big hit, the 100th rotation after the end of the big hit is the final change of the time-reduced gaming state.
<Structure 1>
In a situation where the main game time reduction flag is on, the small hit symbol may be stopped, and the main game time reduction flag may be turned off at the stop timing of the small hit symbol.
<Structure 2>
Under the situation where the main game time reduction flag is on, the small hit symbol is stopped, the main game time reduction flag remains on at the stop timing of the small hit symbol, and the small hit game related to the small hit symbol is started. The main game time reduction flag may be turned off at the timing when the small hit game ends.

In the gaming machine according to this example, if a small hit is won while the main game probability change flag is on, the main game probability change flag remains on while the small hit is being executed, and the main game is played. When a jackpot is won with the probability variation flag turned on, the main game probability variation flag is configured to be turned off while the jackpot is being executed.

Further, in the examples other than the change example 1 from the sixth embodiment and the change example 2 from the sixth embodiment in the gaming machine according to this example, a small hit is won with the main game time reduction flag turned on. If this is the case, the main game time reduction flag remains on while the small hit is being executed, and if the big hit is won while the main game time reduction flag is on, the main game time reduction is during the big hit execution. The flag is configured to be off.

Next, FIG. 107 is an example of the advance notice effect according to this example. As shown in the figure, in this example, there are a plurality of types of notice effects that can be executed, such as a notice effect in which a big hit is definite, a notice effect in which a small hit is definite, and the like. In addition, while there is no notice effect that denies a big hit, there are multiple advance notice effects that deny a small hit, such as "line notice (rainbow)". That is, there are more notice effects that deny small hits than notice effects that deny big hits.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine according to this example may be as follows.
(1) By entering the specific area C22 during the special game, the game shifts to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game.
(2) Distribution of the 2nd main game special game The percentage of big hits (2nd main game chief open big hit) in which the big prize opening is long open in the game execution round is the distribution of the 1st main game special game. It is higher than the percentage of big hits (first main game chief open big hit) where the big winning opening is long open in the game execution round.
(3) If a long-open jackpot is won in a non-probability variable game state and a non-time-shortening game state, and a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the long-open jackpot, the time-shortening game is completed after the long-open jackpot ends. Transition to state (or easy to transition).
(4) If a long-open jackpot is won in a probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state, and a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the long-opening jackpot, a non-time-shortening gaming state after the long-opening jackpot ends. (Or easy to migrate).
(4) When the small hit on the first main game side is won in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state, the game shifts to the probability-variable game state and the non-time-reduced game state after the end of the small hit.

M main control board,
MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management counter, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C1 1st main game timer, MP11t-C2 2nd main game timer MP22t-B 2nd main game Starting port Electric accessory opening timer, MP33c Winning ball counter MP34t Special game timer, MP51c Probability change number counter MP52c Time reduction counter, MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small hit game timer, MP41t-2 Discharge standby timer A Around the first main game Equipment A10 1st main game start port, A11s 1st main game start port entry ball detection device A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol display unit A21h 1st main game symbol hold display unit, B 2nd Main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game start port, B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory, B20 2nd main game symbol display device B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit , B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display unit C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral equipment, C10 1st big winning opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning opening electric accessory C20 2nd Large prize opening, C21s 2nd large winning opening winning detection device C21d 2nd large winning opening electric accessory, C22 specific area C23 2nd large winning opening discharge port, C23s 2nd large winning opening discharge detection device C24 top shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C27 V winning opening, C27s V winning opening ball detection device C20-1 Box-shaped member H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game starting port H11s Auxiliary game starting port entry ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM21t drawing fluctuation time management timer, SM26c look-ahead effect execution counter SM23c stay stage management counter, SM23c2 consecutive villa count counter SM24t power-on timer SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative pattern display Area, SG12 1st hold display unit SG13 2nd hold display unit, SB sub input button SBs sub input button input detection device, KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter, and
An identification information display unit that can display identification information, and an identification information display unit
Equipped with a staging display unit that can display staging
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
A hit / fail judgment means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on a random number acquired by a random number acquisition means, and
Based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means, the identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information, and
Identification information display content An identification information display control means that controls to stop and display the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means.
It is advantageous for the player when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means is the first winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group. A special game control means for executing the first special game,
It is advantageous for the player when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail judgment means is the second winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the special stop identification information belonging to the special group. Special game control means for executing special games,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and is equipped with a game state transition control means that can control the state to be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed.
By entering the game ball into a specific area during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute the second special game which is advantageous for the player.
It is configured so that the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information in the predetermined period of the specific gaming state and the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information in the specific period of the specific gaming state are different.
A specific period is set after the specified period, and the specified period is configured to be longer than the specified period.
One event is that the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the special game, and it is configured to be able to shift to the normal game state when the one event occurs a predetermined number of times in the specific game state. And
The number of types of warning effects that are not executed when the result of the winning / failing judgment by the winning / failing determination means is the second winning, rather than the number of types of the warning effects that are not executed when the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means is the first winning. A pachinko gaming machine that is configured to have more.

Images